Symbiote Product Catalog

TABLE OF CONTENTSTABLE OF CONTENTSwww.symbiote.com 800.283.2434 www.symbiote.com 800.283.2434

FURNITURE FOR INNOVATIVE WORKLIFE SCIENCE/TECH/AEROSPACE

2016

PRODUCT CATALOG


This page left blank

2015

TABLE OF CONTENTSTABLE OF CONTENTSwww.symbiote.com 800.283.2434 www.symbiote.com 800.283.2434Rev. 01.14.16

Welcome to our SIP (Symbiote Integrated Products) catalog. Please reference www.symbiote.com for the latest information. This catalog can change frequently; please review the changes to keep your printed catalog up-to-date.

Updates are noted with the latest revision (Rev.) number at the bottom of the page. The revision number informs you of an important change to the catalog page. Changes to the page may include, but are not limited to, the introduction of a new product, change in description or elimination of a product.

- Date of Change: date the change was made to the catalog- Page Number: page identified where the change was made- Description: brief description of the change that was made

TABLE OF CONTENTS

01.14.1608.20.1507.21.1504.16.1603.26.1503.23.1503.17.1503.03.1502.17.1501.01.1512.23.1408.19.1408.12.1407.29.1405.08.1404.30.1402.24.14

1.7Section 2, 8Section 104.11, 4.264.3711.312.5Section 4Section 312.7Section 11, 7.7-8Section 4, 8.217.5, 12.27.5, 8.78.2, 8.3, 8.511.811.5, 11.6

Revised standard product warrantyRevised end cover description; revised task light descriptionAdded 10.6, 10.11, 10.15, 10.16 Revised descriptionAdded Auxiliary Work Surface 4.37Revised CPU HolderRevised TotesRevised notes to include 60" worksurface, pages 14-15, 17-18, 20-21Added ETL logo to pages 2,3,6,7,8 and 9Added Tote HoldersAdded Accessory Mounting Brackets; shifted pages and revised TOC Added rev dates and revised images; revised description in Section 8.21Revised image and description; revised pivoting arm mount descriptionRemoved Accessory Trays, Added Mounting Bracket; revised Task LightsMerged Electrical Plug Strips to page 8.2; added LED LightsAdded Flat Screen Keyboard TrayRevised images; added Spring Adjustable Flat Screen Arm

Date of Change Page Number Description



2015


Overview

Frames & Connectors

Tables

Work Surfaces & Supports

ESD Grounding Hardware

Shelving

Storage & Display

Electrical & Air

Cable Management

Lab Products

Computer Support

Material Handling & Assembly

123456789

101112

TABLE OF CONTENTS



2015

1.1

OV

ERV

IEW

OVERVIEWOVERVIEWwww.symbiote.com 800.283.2434 www.symbiote.com 800.283.24341

OVERVIEW

General Information

Guide to Pages and Ordering

Technical Furniture Guide

Colors and Finishes

Warranty

Terms and Conditions

1.21.31.41.61.71.8

SECTION 1

1.2

OV

ERV

IEW


GENERAL INFORMATION

ABOUT SYMBIOTE®

Symbiote®, Inc. (“Symbiote”) manufactures furniture which serves environments that fall between the Technical Office and the Technical Factory. We call this the In-between Market. All products and components are engineered and manufactured to give high performance and adaptability in any technical or manufacturing environment.

We are known for taking two approaches to better serve the diverse needs of our customers – we provide the wide range of standard products listed in this catalog plus a responsive custom product development program.

CUSTOM PRODUCT QUOTESPlease submit your custom requests in the form of a written description of your specifications, and/or a sketch of your application needs. Symbiote will acknowledge the request by fax providing you with a special product number, a quote number and details on pricing and delivery.

ORDERINGPlease order products by using the complete product number. Specify quantity, the product number, description, finish option and any other specifying information. When ordering custom products, include the quote number and special product number provided by Symbiote. Your order may be submitted via electronic mail, conventional mail or fax on your purchase order form.

A NOTEThis catalog serves as a general guide for ordering. The illustrations are typical and may not be a true depiction of each product. The illustrations and descriptions are based on the latest information available at the time of publication. All dimensions listed are nominal. Symbiote reserves the right to make changes at any time without notice to finishes, materials and specifications and also to discontinue finishes and products.

COPYRIGHT INFORMATIONSymbiote and PowerTop® are registered trademarks of Symbiote, Inc. ErgoStat™ is a trademark of Symbiote, Inc.

Please call, fax or e-mail us with any questions you may have about this catalog or our products.

Rev. 01.29.09

1.3

OV

ERV

IEW


GUIDE TO PAGES AND ORDERING

SPECIFYSpecifying information is outlined in the grey box located toward the right center of each page. Also note the information contained in the Description and Notes before specifying.

COLORS AND FINISHESColors and Finishes are identified in the grey specification box and include the appropriate finishes available for the product on that page. There are a variety of standard and dissipative paint finishes, laminates and fabrics to choose from.

DESCRIPTIONThis area provides you with valuable information about each of the products. It is a brief description of what the product is, what it does and what it includes. The Description applies to all product variations on the page unless otherwise noted.

NOTESIn this section we state restrictions, exceptions and important considerations for the application, installation or ordering of the products. There may be options and features that apply to only some of the product variations on the page.

PRODUCT ILLUSTRATIONTwo types of illustrations are provided for your reference. Context drawings of the product allow you to see how the product functions in an actual workstation setting. Dimensional drawings provide you with 2D illustrations of the product and are used in conjunction with the chart at the bottom of the page. The dimensional drawings define which measurements Symbiote classifies as Height (H), Width (W) and Depth (D) on that particular product.

PRODUCT NUMBERWhen ordering, please use the complete product number for the appropriate product variation, including finishes and any other specifying information provided in the Notes.

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTSNominal dimensions and weights are provided in standard American measurements of inches and pounds. Metric measurements of millimeters and kilograms are shown in brackets.

PRICESPrices are provided in U.S. dollars in the Price Index only. Symbiote offers a product specification service that provides pricing along with drawings and component lists of your stations. Consult your local Symbiote Sales Representative or Symbiote Customer Service Representative to request a quote.

Rev. 01.29.09

1.4

OV

ERV

IEW


TECHNICAL FURNITURE GUIDE

Rev. 04.22.15

ErgoStat® mobile workbenches perform well in applications requiring ergonomic features such as simultaneous adjustability of surface and riser height, articulating trays and holders. Add modular components such as parabolic lighting, shelves and drawers to customize your ergonomic bench.

UltraFrame mobile workbenches make it possible to quickly and conveniently roll workstations from one area to another. Theycan be linked side by side or back to back, creating double-sided workstations. Adding stations is done with a minimum of downtime.

Mobile carts provide both storage and mobilityfor small to medium-sized components and products, tools and hardware. Shelves and rails hold Totes and Subcontainers in a wide variety of sizes.

1.5

OV

ERV

IEW


TECHNICAL FURNITURE GUIDE

Rev. 04.22.15

Choose from three height adjustable table lines. Electric and pin-adjustable models support loads from 750-1,000 pounds, evenly distributed. Tables are ETL recognized, have up to a 15" travel range and are available with casters or glides. Add a surface accessory bracket, a plug strip, bin rail or cable tray above or below the work surface to maximize your workflow.

The UltraFrame series is commonly used in a variety of Lab applications. The system can be configured side-by-side or back-to-back, creating double-sided workstations with components adjustable in 1" increments. Shelving, electrical and data distributors along with mobile or stationary base cabinets are typical examples of accessories found in these areas.

1.6

OV

ERV

IEW


COLORS AND FINISHES

Rev. 07.27.15

Standard Paint FinishHigh-efficiency powder paint system produces a consistent coverage and finish. This supports Symbiote’s sustainable practices, producing no VOCs and hazardous emissions. Finishes are checked to guarantee quality and color validity. There is a $50.00 USD upcharge for all textured paint.

Online or printed samples may vary depending on your monitor and printer. To request an actual sample please contact your sales representative.

Standard Laminate Workstations, workbenches and ergonomic desks.

Chemsurf Laminate Lab cabinets, casework, counters; tabletops in hospitals and product testing facilities.

Dissipative Laminate High-performance composite to protect sensitive electronic applications.

Grey Light Smooth

GL

Dissipative Grey

DG

Grey Light Texture

GT

Neutral White

NW

Sand Texture

ST

Black Texture

BT

Black

BK

Black

CBK

Grey Light

CGL

Neutral White

CNW

Grey Light

DG

Neutral White

DNW

Sand

DS

Black

DBK

Black

BK

Grey Light

GL

Grey Fleck

GF

Neutral White

NW

White Fleck

WF

Sand

SA

Sand Fleck

SF

FabricFabrics for panels and tackboards is a program in alliance with Gilford of Maine. Customer own material (COM) available.

Eucalyptus

A2047

Geranium

A2084

Graphite

A2079

Subway

M024

Cement

M031

Waterfall

A2691

Angora

A2035

Asteroid

A2053

1.7

OV

ERV

IEW


WARRANTY

Symbiote®, Inc. hereinafter referred to as "the Company," warrants its standard products to be free of defects on material and workmanship from the date of initial delivery for the applicable warranty period specified below, when the products are installed and used in accordance with the Company’s published instructions. This warranty is made by the Company only to purchasers acquiring the product directly from the Company, its authorized dealers/distributors, or others, who are specifically authorized by the Company to sell such products. No person, firm or corporation is authorized to assume for the Company any liability in connection with the sale or installation of the Company’s products except as stated above.

Because of natural variations over which the Company has no control, the Company does not warrant matching of color, grain or texture. The Company makes no warranty with respect to nonstandard materials selected by and used at the request of a customer.

Symbiote Standard Furniture ProductsA one-year warranty period for labor and materials applies to all standard and non-standard products.

An extended warranty, for replacement of material only, applies to the following products.

• 12 years – all standard product and system accessories excluding products and components listed below. The following items are limited to the original equipment manufacturer's warranty: • 1 years – ESD laminate and magnification lights• 2 years – Task lighting (excluding lamps) • 5 years – Electric, height adjustable tables

Nonstandard Products• 1 year – all non-catalog custom products and alternatives

The Company’s obligations and the purchaser’s remedy pursuant to the foregoing warranty are limited to repair or replacement at the Company’s option, F.O.B. the Company’s plant, products which prove to be defective within the first year of the warranty period and to furnish necessary repair parts for the products which prove to be defective within the remainder of the extended warranty period. The Company will determine whether defective products should be returned to the Company. Repaired or replaced product will be returned to the purchaser at the Company’s expense. Purchasers may be required to establish that the products were installed according to the Company’s specification and is within the warranty period by producing invoices or other such evidence as may be reasonably satisfactory by the Company.

THERE ARE NO OTHER WARRANTIES EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY SET FORTH ABOVE, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

The Company shall not be liable for loss of time, inconvenience, commercial loss, incidental or consequential damages.

The remedies stated herein are expressly agreed to be exclusive as a condition of sale, and the Company’s liability with respect to its products or installation services shall not exceed that expressly set forth above irrespective of the theory upon which any claim might be based, including breach of contract, warranty, negligence or strict liability of tort.

The Company does not warrant product exposed to extreme environmental conditions or that have been subject to improper use or storage. In addition, the Company does not warrant failure resulting from normal wear and tear.

Rev. 01.14.16

1.8

OV

ERV

IEW


TERMS AND CONDITIONS

CONTRACT TERMSAll quotations, proposals, or similar communications from Symbiote®, Inc. (“Symbiote”) shall be considered “invitations to contract”. Any order placed by a customer must be in the form of a written purchase order and shall be considered an “offer”. Any acknowledgment of an order by Symbiote must be in writing and shall be considered an “acceptance” which, when mailed or faxed to the customer, shall then result in a binding sales contract of which these Standard Terms and Conditions shall be a part. Acceptances may be made only at Symbiote’s home office in Zeeland, Michigan, and all sales contracts shall be made pursuant to and controlled by the laws of the State of Michigan. Notwithstanding any inconsistent or contrary term which may appear on a customer’s purchase order, Symbiote’s goods are sold only upon these Standard Terms and Conditions.PRICESPublished pricing is U. S. dollars unless otherwise stated on the face side, all prices are F.O.B. Symbiote’s factory, Zeeland, Michigan, and do not include freight, storage, handling, uncrating or installation charges. Upon request Symbiote will provide estimated freight charges F.O.B. destination. Prices do not include sales, use, excise or any other taxes or assessments which may be applicable to the sale.Prices do not include design services or field adjustment of the product except that provided under the warranty. Field Design/Engineering services can be supplied at a per diem rate plus travel and living expenses unless specified under contract.Symbiote reserves the right to make changes in pricing without notice.ORDERING INFORMATIONAll orders must be in writing to avoid error and/or duplication. Order all products by their complete product number. Specify quantity, product number, product description, finish option and any other specifying information requested. Orders are to be submitted via electronic mail, conventional mail or fax, on your purchase order form. An acknowledgment will be issued within five working days of acceptance of the order with an approximate ship date of the product ordered.TAXESIn addition to the purchase price, the customer shall be liable for all sales, use and excise taxes and/or other governmental charges imposed in respect of the sale, delivery or installation of the goods being purchased by the customer hereunder (except taxes on or measured by net income of Symbiote), including those which Symbiote may be required to pay, except where the law otherwise provides. Unless otherwise specified on the face side hereof, the customer shall pay all such taxes directly to the appropriate taxing authorities.PAYMENTThe payment terms contained in this paragraph apply only to customers whose credit has been approved by Symbiote. For purchases of standard goods offered in Symbiote’s Integrated Products publication, Symbiote offers a one percent (1%) discount off of the purchase price for full payments made within ten (10) days after the invoice date. All payments are due within thirty (30) days after the invoice date. For purchases of custom goods, payment terms are fifty percent (50%) of the total purchase price deposited with the order and the total remaining purchase price payable within thirty (30) days after the invoice date. Beginning thirty (30) days after the invoice date, the customer shall pay a late payment charge of one and one-half percent (11/2%) per month on any unpaid portion of the purchase price. Visa, MasterCard, American Express and Discover credit cards are accepted.Symbiote reserves the right to revoke or modify these credit terms at any time.

Rev. 04.22.15

1.9

OV

ERV

IEW


TERMS AND CONDITIONS (CONTINUED)

RETENTION OF TITLE; SECURITY INTERESTSymbiote shall retain title to the goods, any replacements thereof, and any additions thereto, for purpose of security, and title shall not pass to the customer until the purchase price and all sums due hereunder are fully paid. The customer shall execute a financing statement (if requested by Symbiote) and other documents necessary to enable Symbiote to place third parties on notice of its title to the goods. SHIPMENTAll orders shipped F.O.B. Zeeland, MI will have the freight bills directly sent from the carrier to the purchaser for direct payment by the purchaser. All orders shipped F.O.B destination will have freight included in the invoice. Special shipping costs, if specified by the purchaser, will be the responsibility of the purchaser. Any shipping date shown on the face hereof represents Symbiote’s best estimate as of the date hereof. However, Symbiote shall not incur any liability of any kind for failure to ship on any particular date unless a firm shipping date has been expressly agreed to by an officer of Symbiote in a separately signed written instrument. Responsibility for the product and risk of loss shall pass to the customer when the goods are placed in the possession of a common carrier. Claims against the carrier shall be the responsibility of the customer. Claims against Symbiote for apparent defects, errors or shortages must be made in writing to Symbiote within thirty (30) days of receipt of the goods or such claims shall be considered waived and the goods accepted as delivered. If the customer claims the goods delivered are non-conforming, the customer shall afford Symbiote prompt and reasonable opportunity to inspect the goods. Symbiote’s liability for non-conforming goods shall be limited to repair or replacement of such goods or allowance of credit for such goods, at Symbiote’s option. If Symbiote and the customer are unable to reach settlement of any claim relating to goods, the customer must institute legal action against Symbiote within one (1) year after such claim arises and thereafter all such claims shall be barred, notwithstanding any statutory period of limitations to the contrary.SELECTION OF GOODSThe selection of particular models, styles, colors, fabrics and specifications of goods and the suit ability thereof for the customer’s specific application are the sole responsibility of the customer.DELAYS AND CHANGE ORDERSAfter the date an order from the customer is acknowledged by Symbiote, the customer may not change the order, in whole or in part, without Symbiote’s written approval. All changes must be requested in writing. Where a proposed change would necessitate substantial delays in shipment and the goods have not yet become work in process, Symbiote may condition its approval upon a price change to reflect Symbiote’s prevailing prices at the time of such delayed shipment. Orders for custom goods, including without limitation goods with nonstandard finishes, are not subject to change.The company will not be responsible for delays in shipment due to customer requested changes to an order.STORAGEIf the customer requests a delay in shipment after the goods have become work in process, Symbiote may place the finished goods in storage at the customer’s risk and expense, and transfer to storage shall be considered delivery for all purposes, including invoicing and payment. Upon request of the purchaser, Symbiote will store an order at the factory for up to 30 days after the acknowledged ship date at no charge. Beginning on the 31st day, storage fees will be assessed on a per diem basis.

Rev. 04.22.15

1.10

OV

ERV

IEW


CANCELLATIONAfter the date an order from the customer is acknowledged by Symbiote, the customer may not cancel the order without Symbiote’s written approval. All cancellations must be requested in writing. Symbiote’s approval of cancellation shall be conditioned on the customer’s payment of a cancellation charge of fifteen percent (15%) of the total purchase price and reimbursement of costs incurred by Symbiote prior to such approval, including engineering, testing, material costs, labor and burden and similar expenses in connection with the order cancelled. Orders for custom goods, including without limitation goods with nonstandard finishes, are not subject to cancellation. RETURNSThe customer may not return goods without Symbiote’s written approval. Returns must be requested within 90 days of the original shipment. Symbiote’s approval of returns shall be conditioned on the goods being returned to Symbiote (i) in compliance with Symbiote’s shipping instructions, (ii) within 90 days of the issuance of Symbiote’s RGA (Returned Goods Authorization) number (iii) with all return shipping charges being prepaid by customer, (iv) in a suitable condition for resale, and (v) with the customer’s payment of a restocking charge of fifteen percent (15%) of the total purchase price. Symbiote will charge the customer for repairs to returned goods at customary rates. Custom goods, including without limitation goods with nonstandard finishes, are not subject to return. WARRANTY MATTERSSymbiote’s standard published warranties in effect at the time of shipment shall apply to all goods manufactured by Symbiote. Components which are purchased and resold without further processing by Symbiote are not covered by Symbiote’s warranty, but Symbiote will pass on to the customer whatever warranty Symbiote receives from the manufacturer of such goods. THESE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND ARE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS, IMPLIED, OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.DAMAGE LIMITATIONThe liability of Symbiote arising out of the sale or use of the goods, whether based on negligence, breach of contract, strict liability or otherwise, shall not in any event exceed the original purchase price of the goods. Under no circumstances shall Symbiote be liable for any lost profits or any incidental or consequential damages of any kind with respect to its goods or the transactions by which its goods are sold.EXCUSEIn no event shall Symbiote be liable for any loss or damage resulting from any delay or failure in shipment or other failure to perform with respect to the goods where such delay, failure, loss or damage is the proximate result of any act of any governmental authority, revolution, riot, civil disorder or disturbance, act of enemies, delay or default in transportation, strike, dispute among or between labor unions or other labor disputes, inability to obtain materials or facilities from normal sources, fire, flood, act of God or any cause not within the reasonable control of Symbiote, whether of the class of causes enumerated or otherwise. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, Symbiote may, without causing a breach or incurring liability, allocate goods which are in short supply irrespective of the reasons therefore among customers in any manner which Symbiote in its sole discretion considers advisable.MODIFICATIONThe terms and conditions of this quotation can be modified only by a written instrument signed by Symbiote.INFRINGEMENTIf the goods sold hereunder are to be manufactured according to the customer’s specifications, the customer shall indemnify Symbiote against any claims or liability for patent or trademark infringement on account of such manufacture.

Rev. 04.22.15

TERMS AND CONDITIONS (CONTINUED)

FRA

MES &

CO

NN

ECTO

RS

2.1FRAMES & CONNECTORSFRAMES & CONNECTORSwww.symbiote.com 800.283.2434 www.symbiote.com 800.283.24342

FRAMES & CONNECTORS

UltraFrames with Glides & Casters

UltraFrame Spines

Connector Posts

Panel Connectors and Rigid Corner Connectors

Joiner Plates

Touch-up Paint

C Leg Supports

A Leg Supports

Panel End Covers

Footrests

2.22.42.52.62.72.72.82.92.102.11

SECTION 2

2.2

FRA

MES

& C

ON

NEC

TOR

S

FRAMES & CONNECTORSFRAMES & CONNECTORSwww.symbiote.com 800.283.2434 www.symbiote.com 800.283.2434

ULTRAFRAMES WITH GLIDES & CASTERS

Rev. 11.02.10

DESCRIPTION • Open steel frames provide structural support for hanging components.• Frames permit vertical adjustment of components in 1" increments.• Frames attach to all frame styles of equal or unequal height.• C Leg and A Leg Supports attach to connection points on the front and back sides of UltraFrames to provide standing support.• Equipped with connection points for end mounting of Pivot Arms and Power/Data Brackets as well as attachment points for ESD grounding hardware.• Frames are equipped with two leveling glides.

FRAMES WITH GLIDES:• 80" high frames feature #10-24 threaded inserts for horizontal top mounting of Cable Ring Ducts and Cable Ducts Top Mount. Inserts are spaced to accommodate products with the same width as the frames.• 80" high frames feature 1/4"-20 threaded inserts for vertical inside mounting of Cable Ducts Frame Mount, Cable Ring Ducts and Plug Strips. 80" high frames accommodate a 48" component on each side of the inside face of the frame. • Load capacity 1000 lbs. each side evenly distributed.

FRAMES WITH CASTERS:• 80" high frames feature #10-24 threaded inserts for horizontal top mounting of Cable Ring Ducts and Cable Ducts Top Mount. Inserts are spaced to accommodate products with the same width as the frames.• 80” high frames feature 1/4"-20 threaded inserts for vertical inside mounting of Cable Ducts Frame Mount, Cable Ring Ducts, Plug Strips. 80" high frames accommodate a 48" component per side.• Frames are equipped with two 4" diameter polypropylene casters with totalock brakes (simultaneously locks the swivel and wheel).• Load capacity 500 lbs. each side evenly distributed.

W

H

D

FRONT SIDE

W

H

D

FRONT SIDE

FRA

MES &

CO

NN

ECTO

RS


ULTRAFRAMES WITH GLIDES & CASTERS

NOTES • Panel Connectors, Corner Connectors or Connector Posts are required to attach adjacent frames. Order separately; see pages 2.5 and 2.6.• Optional Panel End Covers can be ordered to finish exposed hardware. Order separately; see page 2.10.• C Legs and A Legs sold separately; see pages 2.8 and 2.9.• 48" and 60" wide frames can be divided with UltraFrame Spines; see page 2.4.• Joiner Plates are required to support adjacent frames with casters. Order separately; see page 2.7.

TO ORDER, SPECIFY:1) Product Number2) Finish Standard or Dissipative Standard Finishes: BK Black BT Black Texture* GL Grey Light Smooth GT Grey Light Texture* NW Neutral White ST Sand Texture* Dissipative Finish: DG Dissipative Grey Light Smooth

* Paint upcharge applies

Rev. 11.02.10

UF4824 48 [1219] 24 [610] 2 [51] 36 [16]UF4830 48 [1219] 30 [762] 2 [51] 39 [18]UF4836 48 [1219] 36 [914] 2 [51] 42 [19]UF4848 48 [1219] 48 [1219] 2 [51] 46 [21]UF4860 48 [1219[ 60 [1524] 2 [51] 52 [24]UF6224 62 [1575] 24 [610] 2 [51] 43 [20]UF6230 62 [1575] 30 [762] 2 [51] 46 [21]UF6236 62 [1575] 36 [914] 2 [51] 49 [22]UF6248 62 [1575] 48 [1219] 2 [51] 54 [25]UF6260 62 [1575] 60 [1524] 2 [51] 59 [27]UF8024 80 [2032] 24 [610] 2 [51] 52 [24]UF8030 80 [2032] 30 [762] 2 [51] 54 [25]UF8036 80 [2032] 36 [914] 2 [51] 57 [26]UF8048 80 [2032] 48 1219] 2 [51] 62 [28]UF8060 80 [2032] 60 [1524] 2 [51] 67 [30]

UltraFrameS WITH GLIDES - PRODUCT DIMENSIONS Product Height Width Depth WeightNumber in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] lb. [kg]

UF4824C5 48 [1219] 24 [610] 2 [51] 36 [16]UF4830C5 48 [1219] 30 [762] 2 [51] 39 [18]UF4836C5 48 [1219] 36 [914] 2 [51] 42 [19]UF4848C5 48 [1219] 48 [1219] 2 [51] 46 [21]UF4860C5 48 [1219] 60 [1524] 2 [51] 52 [24]UF6224C5 62 [1575] 24 [610] 2 [51] 47 [21]UF6230C5 62 [1575] 30 [762] 2 [51] 50 [23]UF6236C5 62 [1575] 36 [914] 2 [51] 53 [24]UF6248C5 62 [1575] 48 [1219] 2 [51] 58 [26]UF6260C5 62 [1575] 60 [1524] 2 [51] 63 [29]UF8024C5 80 [2032] 24 [610] 2 [51] 56 [25]UF8030C5 80 [2032] 30 [762] 2 [51] 58 [26]UF8036C5 80 [2032] 36 [914] 2 [51] 61 [28]UF8048C5 80 [2032] 48 [1219] 2 [51] 66 [30]UF8060C5 80 [2032] 60 [1524] 2 [51] 71 [32]

UltraFrameS WITH CASTERS - PRODUCT DIMENSIONS Product Height Width Depth WeightNumber in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] lb. [kg]

2.4

FRA

MES

& C

ON

NEC

TOR

S


NOTES • 48" wide frames divide into two 24" sections.• 60" wide frames divide into two 30" sections or a 24" and 36" section.• Overhead Cableways will not mount over Frame Spines.• UltraFrame Spines do not attach to ErgoStat™ Riser Frames.

Rev. 11.02.10

FS48 401/2 [1029] 5 [127] 2 [51] 22 [10]FS62 541/2 [1384] 5 [127] 2 [51] 29 [13]FS80 721/2 [1842] 5 [127] 2 [51] 38 [17]

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS Product Height Width Depth WeightNumber in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] lb. [kg]

DESCRIPTION • UltraFrame Spines divide 48" and 60" wide UltraFrames into two smaller sections.• Spines permit vertical adjustment of components in 1" increments and provide attachment points for ESD grounding hardware.• Spines are sold as a pair and bolt to top and bottom connection points on UltraFrames.• 80" high Frame Spines feature 1/4"-20 threaded inserts for vertical inside mounting of Cable Ducts Frame Mount, Cable Ring Ducts and Plug Strips. The pair of spines accommodate two 48" components.

ULTRAFRAME SPINES



W

H

D

FRONT SIDE

FRA

MES &

CO

NN

ECTO

RS


NOTES • Optional Mid End Covers can be ordered to trim the exposed hardware of Mid Connector Posts when used at the end of Panel runs. Order separately; see page 2.10.• Joiner Plates are required when used with UltraFrames with Casters. Order separately; see page 2.7.• Connector Posts add additional length to a run of panels.

Rev. 11.02.10

CPE48 end 48 (1219) 21/2 [64] 2 [51] 17 [8]CPE62 end 62 (1575) 21/2 [64] 2 [51] 22 [10]CPE80 end 80 (2032) 21/2 [64] 2 [51] 27 [12]CPM48 mid 48 (1219) 3 [76] 2 [51] 17 [8]CPM62 mid 60 (1524) 3 [76] 2 [51] 22 [10]CPM80 mid 80 (2032) 3 [76] 2 [51] 27 [12]

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS Product Height Width Depth WeightNumber Description in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] lb. [kg]

DESCRIPTION • Connector Posts provide panel support outside the boundaries of UltraFrames.• Posts attach to UltraFrames and Panels of the same height without Panel Connectors.• A Legs and C Legs bolt to both the front and back sides of 48", 62" and 80" high Connector Posts.

CONNECTOR POSTS

CPMCPE



W

H

D

FRONT SIDE

2.6

FRA

MES

& C

ON

NEC

TOR

S


NOTES • Variable Height End Covers are required to trim the exposed side of the taller frames or connectors when attaching frames or connectors of lesser heights. Order separately; see page 2.10.• Corner Connectors add additional length to a run of panels. Panel Connectors add no additional length.

Rev. 11.02.10

PANEL CONNECTORS AND RIGID CORNER CONNECTORS

DESCRIPTION Panel Connectors• Panel Connectors attach adjacent UltraFrames or Panels of equal height in straight lines.• Order connectors to match the height of the frames.• Finish is Black.

Height Change Panel Connectors • Height Change Panel Connectors attach adjacent UltraFrames or Panels of unequal height in straight lines.• Order connectors to match the height of the shorter frames. For example, 80" high frames connecting to 62" high frames require 62" Height Change Panel Connectors.• Finish is Black.

PC48 Panel Connector 48 [1219] 1 [.5]PC62 Panel Connector 62 [1575] 1 [.5]PC80 Panel Connector 80 [2032] 2 [1]PCH48 height change 48 [1219] 1 [.5]PCH62 height change 62 [1575] 1 [.5]PCH80 height change 80 [2032] 2 [1]C9048 two-way 48 [1219] 23/4 [70] 23/4 [70] 6 [3]C9062 two-way 62 [1575] 23/4 [70] 23/4 [70] 8 [4]C9080 two-way 80 [2032] 23/4 [70] 23/4 [70] 10 [5]C362 three-way 62 [1575] 31/2 [89] 23/4 [70] 11 [5]C380 three-way 80 [2032] 31/2 [89] 23/4 [70] 13 [6] C462 four-way 62 [1575] 31/2 [89] 31/2 [70] 11 [5] C480 four-way 80 [2038] 31/2 [89] 31/2 [70] 11 [5]


PCH48(cat)

PCHPCH

PC48&C348(cat)

PC

C3

PCC3

C4

Side TopC4 C3 C90

C90

C9048&C448(cat)

DDD

WWWH

C90

C4

C4

Side TopC4 C3 C90

C90

C9048&C448(cat)

DDD

WWWH W W W

C90C3C4

DDD

H

TOPSIDE



FRA

MES &

CO

NN

ECTO

RS


TO ORDER, SPECIFY:1) Product Number

Rev. 10.15.09

JOINER PLATESPANEL CONNECTORS AND RIGID CORNER CONNECTORS

DESCRIPTION • Joiner Plates provide structural support for UltraFrames with Casters when connected with Panel Connectors, Connector Posts, Two-way Corner Connectors or Three-way Corner Connectors.• Steel plates bolt to the bottom of UltraFrames and Connector Posts in place of the glides.• Finish is Black.

JPL2BK frame/frame 3/4 [19] 5 [127] 2 [51] 1/4 [.1]JPL390BK three-way corner 3/4 [19] 8 [203] 2 [51] 1/2 [.2]JPL3BK frame/post/frame 3/4 [19] 51/4 [133] 51/4 [133] 1/2 [.2]JPL90BK two-way corner 3/4 [19] 81/2 [216] 51/4 [133] 1/2 [.2]


JPL3(cat)

JPL2 & JPL3

JPL3

End

JPL90 JPL390

Top

W

W W

H

D

D

JPL3

JP2(cat)

JPL2JPL2

JPL3(cat)

JPL2 & JPL3

JPL3

End

JPL90 JPL390

Top

W

W W

H

D

D

W

WW

D

D

H

TOP

END

JPL2 & JPL3

JPL90 JPL390


DESCRIPTION • 12 ounce aerosol spray cans allow for color matched touch up of marred painted surfaces.• Cans cannot be shipped via air transport.

TPBT Black Texture 1 [.5]TPGL Grey Light Smooth 1 [.5]TPGT Grey Light Texture 1 [.5]TPNW Neutral White 1 [.5]TPST Sand Texture 1 [.5]

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS Product WeightNumber Description lb. [kg]

TOUCH UP PAINT

2.8

FRA

MES

& C

ON

NEC

TOR

S


NOTES • Do not use 24" deep C Legs with 36" deep surfaces.• Surface B Support Brackets sold separately; see page 4.26.

Rev. 11.02.10

C LEG SUPPORTS

DESCRIPTION • C Legs provide standing support for UltraFrames.• Legs bolt to connection points on both the front and back sides of UltraFrames and Connector Posts.• Legs are each equipped with a leveling glide or a 4" diameter polypropylene caster with totalock brake (simultaneously locks swivel and wheel). C Legs with Casters bolt to UltraFrames with Casters. C Legs with Glides bolt to UltraFrames with Glides and Connector Posts.• Surface B Support Brackets fasten to either side of C Legs for surface mounting.

CLM24 glide 251/2 [635] 11/2 [38] 23 [572] 13 [6]CLM30 glide 251/2 [635] 11/2 [38] 29 [724] 16 [7]CLM24C5 caster 251/2 [635] 11/2 [38] 23 [572] 15 [7]CLM30C5 caster 251/2 [635] 11/2 [38] 29 [724] 18 [8] CLT24 glide 301/2 [762] 11/2 [38] 23 [572] 14 [6]CLT30 glide 301/2 [762] 11/2 [38] 29 [724] 17 [8]CLT24C5 caster 301/2 [762] 11/2 [38] 23 [572] 16 [7]CLT30C5 caster 301/2 [762] 11/2 [38] 29 [724] 19 [9]


CLM24C5CLM24



W

H

D

FRONT SIDE

W

H

D

FRONT SIDE

FRA

MES &

CO

NN

ECTO

RS


NOTES • A Legs are used for supporting components 15" deep or less when mounted on the back sides of stations.

Rev. 02.26.10

A LEG SUPPORTS

DESCRIPTION • A Legs provide light loading and stabilizing support for the back sides of workstations.• Legs bolt to connection points on both the front and back sides of UltraFrames and Connector Posts.• Legs are each equipped with a leveling glide or a 4" diameter polypropylene caster with totalock brake (simultaneously locks swivel and wheel). A Legs with Casters bolt to UltraFrames with Casters. A Legs with Glides bolt to UltraFrames with Glides and Connector Posts.

ALG glide 23 [584] 11/2 [38] 8 [203] 6 [3]ALC5 caster 23 [584] 11/2 [38] 8 [203] 8 [4]


ALGALC5

FRONT SIDE

W D

H

FRONT SIDE

W D

H



2.10

FRA

MES

& C

ON

NEC

TOR

S


NOTES• ErgoStat Riser Frames require Riser Frame End Covers to finish exposing hardware; see page 3.5.

Rev. 08.25.15

PANEL END COVERS

DESCRIPTION Panel End Covers• Metal covers finish exposed hardware on the ends of UltraFrames, Fabric and Laminate Panels.

Mid End Covers• Metal covers finish exposed hardware on the ends of Mid Connector Posts.

Variable Height End Covers• Plastic covers finish exposed hardware when connecting Ultra Frames or Panels of unequal heights.• Covers can be field cut to the appropriate lengths. Specify finish: (BU) Black Umber; (GL) Grey Light or (NW) Neutral White.

EC48 panel end cover 48 [1219] 2 [51] 1/2 [13] 3 [1]EC62 panel end cover 62 [1575] 2 [51] 1/2 [13] 4 [2]EC80 panel end cover 80 [2032] 2 [51] 1/2 [13] 5 [2]MEC48 mid end cover 48 [1219] 2 [51] 1/2 [13] 4 [2]MEC62 mid end cover 62 [1575] 2 [51] 1/2 [13] 5 [2]MEC80 mid end cover 80 [2032] 2 [51] 1/2 [13] 6 [3]VEC variable cover 32 [810] 2 [51] 1/2 [13] 3 [1]


EC48 & VEC & MEC

VEC MEC

EC

TopFront

D

W

H

MEC

EC48 & VEC & MEC

VEC MEC

EC

TopFront

D

W

H

VEC

EC

EC48 & VEC & MEC

VEC MEC

EC

TopFront

D

W

H

FRONT TOP

W

D

H



FRA

MES &

CO

NN

ECTO

RS

2.11FRAMES & CONNECTORSFRAMES & CONNECTORSwww.symbiote.com 800.283.2434 www.symbiote.com 800.283.2434 Rev. 11.03.10

FOOTRESTS

DESCRIPTION • Portable Footrests support legs and feet when seated.• Treadles move on the bases with light foot pressure, providing a 15° range of articulation.• Foot treadles are black with chrome bases. Dissipative finish not available.


FR100 tilting footrest 33/8 [86] 19 [483] 113/4 [299] 5 [2]FR300 foot machine 33/4 [95] 16 [406] 113/4 [299] 10 [5]


FR100

FR300

W

D

H

FR300

W

D

H

FR100



2015

3.1TABLESTABLESwww.symbiote.com 800.283.2434 www.symbiote.com 800.283.2434

TAB

LES

3TABLES

ErgoStat® Base, Electric

ErgoStat Base, Positionable

ErgoStat Riser Frame

ErgoStat Riser Spine and Riser Frame End Cover

WorkTable Base, Electric

WorkTable Base, Positionable

Table Base, Electric

Table Base, Positionable

ErgoStat Footrest

Lower Shelf: Table, WorkTable, ErgoStat

Electric Base Hand Control

4-Legged Table

Lower Shelf, 4-Legged Table

3.23.33.43.53.63.73.83.93.103.113.123.133.15

SECTION 3

3.2 TABLESTABLESwww.symbiote.com 800.283.2434 www.symbiote.com 800.283.2434

TAB

LES

ESERC

Rev. 01.01.15

NOTES • ErgoStat Riser Frames sold

separately; see page 3.4.• Ultra Surfaces sold separately; see Section 4.0. Bases will not

accommodate 24" deep surfaces.• International electrical

configuration, greater load capacity and tilt options available. Consult factory for ordering information.

• Optional control box switches available; see page 3.12

ESERG

ERGOSTAT® BASE - ELECTRIC

DESCRIPTION • Use with 30" or 36" deep Ultra Surfaces to construct height adjustable

benches.• Optional attachable Riser Frame bolts to bases to provide upright

support for hanging components.• The electrically driven self-guided aluminum assemblies have a

15" travel range from 261/2" to 411/2" to the underside of the surfaces, rising at 1/2" per second.

• Bases require 120 Volt, 60 Hz. power. A height control box with rocker switch and a 91/2' power cord are supplied.

• Amp draw: 4 Amps.• Available with leveling glides or 4" polypropylene casters with totalock

brakes (simultaneously locks the swivel and wheel).• Dissipative bases each include two Ground Chains.• Gross dynamic load capacity 750 lbs. evenly distributed.• Shipped fully assembled. Control boxes field installed to surfaces.• ETL recognized; conforms to UL Std. 962 and certified to CSA Std.

C22.2 No. 68.

ESERG36A glides 30 [762] 321/8 [816] 83 [38]ESERG48A glides 42 [1067] 321/8 [816] 86 [39]ESERG60A glides 54 [1372] 321/8 [816] 90 [41] ESERG72A glides 66 [1676] 321/8 [816] 94 [43]ESERG96A glides 90 [2286] 321/8 [816] 101 [46] ESERC36A casters 30 [762] 341/8 [867] 126 [57]ESERC48A casters 42 [1067] 341/8 [867] 130 [59]ESERC60A casters 54 [1372] 341/8 [867] 133 [60]ESERC72A casters 66 [1676] 341/8 [867] 137 [62]ESERC96A casters 90 [2286] 343/4 [867] 144 [65]

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS Product Width Depth WeightNumber Description in. [mm] in. [mm] lb. [kg]



W

41 /1 2

26 /1 2

D


TAB

LES

DESCRIPTION • Use with 30" or 36" deep Ultra Surfaces to construct height adjustable

benches.• Optional attachable Riser Frame bolts to bases to provide upright

support for hanging components.• The self-guided aluminum assemblies have a 15" travel range from

261/2" to 411/2" to the underside of the surfaces. Bases adjust in 1" increments with threaded fasteners.

• Available with leveling glides or 4" polypropylene casters with totalock brakes (simultaneously locks the swivel and wheel).

• Dissipative bases each include two Ground Chains.• Load capacity 750 lbs. evenly distributed.• Shipped fully assembled.• ETL recognized; conforms to UL Std. 962 and certified to CSA Std.

C22.2 No. 68.

Rev. 01.01.15

NOTES • ErgoStat Riser Frames sold

separately; see page 3.4.• Ultra Surfaces sold separately; see Section 4.0. Bases will not

accommodate 24" deep surfaces.

ESPRCESPRG

ERGOSTAT® BASE - POSITIONABLE

ESPRG36W glides 30 [762] 321/8 [816] 68 [31]ESPRG48W glides 42 [1067] 321/8 [816] 71 [32]ESPRG60W glides 54 [1372] 321/8 [816] 75 [34] ESPRG72W glides 66 [1676] 321/8 [816] 78 [35]ESPRG96W glides 90 [2286] 321/8 [816] 85 [39] ESPRC36W casters 30 [762] 341/8 [867] 111 [50]ESPRC48W casters 42 [1067] 341/8 [867] 115 [52]ESPRC60W casters 54 [1372] 341/8 [867] 119 [54]ESPRC72W casters 66 [1676] 341/8 [867] 122 [55]ESPRC96W casters 90 [2286] 341/8 [867] 129 [59]

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS Product Width Depth WeightNumber Description in. [mm] in. [mm] lb. [kg]



W

41 /1 2

26 /1 2

D


TAB

LES

NOTES • Riser Frames extend 381/2" above

surfaces.• Riser Spines sold separately; see

page 3.5.• Optional Riser Frame End Covers

can be ordered to finish exposed hardware. Sold separately; see page 3.5.

• Do not hang components from the unsupported side of a frame or panel.

Rev. 11.06.12

RF

ERGOSTAT® RISER FRAME

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS

RF4336 43 [1092] 36 [914] 2 [51] 41 [19]RF4348 43 [1092] 48 [1219] 2 [51] 50 [23]RF4360 43 [1092] 60 [1524] 2 [51] 59 [27]RF4372 43 [1092] 72 [1829] 2 [51] 68 [31]RF4396 43 [1092] 76 [2438] 2 [51] 86 [39]

Product Height Width Depth WeightNumber in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] lb. [kg]

DESCRIPTION • Open style frame provides upright support for hanging components.• Frame bolts to ErgoStat Base, adjusting in height with the base.• Frame permits vertical adjustment of components in 1" increments

and provides one attachment point for ESD grounding hardware per unit.

• Equipped with attachment points for Riser Spines; 36" wide Riser Frame excluded.

• Frame features 1/4"-20 threaded inserts for vertical inside mounting of Cable Ducts Frame Mount, Cable Ring Ducts, Plug Strips and 12 Port Data Chases. Riser Frames accommodate a 36" component per side.

• Load capacity 250 lbs.

FRONT SIDE



H

WD


TAB

LESERGOSTAT® RISER SPINES AND RISER FRAME END COVER

NOTES • Riser Frame sold separately; see page 3.4.• Riser Frame Sections Allowed 48” two 24” 60” two 30” or one 24” and one 36” 72” two 36” or three 24” 96” four 24”

Rev. 11.06.12

RS

RFC

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS

RS43BK spine 43 [1092] 2 [51] 11/4 [32] 5 [2]RFC43 end cover 43 [1092] 1/2 [13] 2 [51] 1 [.5]

Product Height Depth Width WeightNumber Description in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] lb. [kg]

DESCRIPTION Riser Spines• Riser Spines divide ErgoStat Riser Frames into smaller sections

and provide upright support for hanging components.• Spines permit vertical adjustment of components in 1" increments

and bolt to attachment points on Riser Frames.• Riser Spines provide hanger frames on the front only; spines cannot

be used for mounting Center Shelves or saddle-mounted arms.• Finish is Black.

Riser Frame End Covers• Metal covers finish exposed hardware on the ends of Riser Frames.• Sold individually.• Finish must be specified.

RFC

H

DW

RS

H

DW




TAB

LES

WORKTABLE BASE - ELECTRIC

NOTES • WorkTops sold separately; see

pages 4.22 - 4.25. • International electrical configuration

and greater load capacity options available. Consult factory for ordering information.

• Optional control box switches available; see page 3.12

Rev. 01.01.15

WTERG WTERC

DESCRIPTION • Use with WorkTops to construct two-sided height adjustable tables.• 48" wide bases accommodate 48", 60" and 72" wide tops. The 72" wide

bases accommodate 72" and 96" wide tops.• The electrically driven self-guided aluminum assemblies have a


• Bases require 120 Volt, 60 Hz. power. A height control box with rocker switch and a 91/2' power cord are supplied.

• Amp draw: 4 Amps.• Available with leveling glides or 4" polypropylene casters with

totalock brakes (simultaneously locks the swivel and wheel).• Dissipative bases each include two Ground Chains.• Gross dynamic load capacity 750 lbs. evenly distributed.• Shipped fully assembled. Control boxes field installed to surfaces.• ETL recognized; conforms to UL Std. 962 and certified to CSA Std.

C22.2 No. 68.

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS

WTERG3048A glides 42 [1067] 30 [762] 106 [48]WTERG3072A glides 66 [1676] 30 [762] 113 [51]WTERC3048A casters 42 [1067] 30 [762] 119 [54]WTERC3072A casters 66 [1676] 30 [762] 126 [57]

Product Width Depth WeightNumber Description in. [mm] in. [mm] lb. [kg]



411/2

261/2

D

W


TAB

LESWORKTABLE BASE - POSITIONABLE

NOTES • WorkTops sold separately; see pages 4.22 - 4.25.

Rev. 01.01.15

WTPRG WTPRC

DESCRIPTION • Use with WorkTops to construct two-sided height adjustable tables.• 48" wide bases accommodate 48", 60" and 72" wide tops. 72" wide

bases accommodate 72" and 96" wide tops.• The self-guided aluminum assemblies have a 15" travel range from


• Available with leveling glides or 4" polypropylene casters with totalock brakes (simultaneously locks the swivel and wheel).

• Dissipative bases each include two Ground Chains.• Load capacity 750 lbs. evenly distributed.• Shipped fully assembled.• ETL recognized; conforms to UL Std. 962 and certified to CSA Std.

C22.2 No. 68.

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS

WTPRG3048W glides 42 [1067] 30 [762] 126 [41] WTPRG3072W glides 66 [1676] 30 [762] 98 [45]WTPRC3048W casters 42 [1067] 30 [762] 103 [47]WTPRC3072W casters 66 [1676] 30 [762] 111 [50]




W

411/2

261/2

D


TAB

LES

TABLE BASE - ELECTRIC

NOTES • Surfaces sold separately; see Section 4.0.• Accessories greater than 12" deep cannot be mounted to 24" deep. • When mounted to Table Bases, 30" and 36" deep Ultra Surfaces are limited to 18" and 24" deep accessories respectively.• International electrical configuration and greater load capacity options available. • Optional control box switches available; see page 3.12.

Rev. 01.01.15

DESCRIPTION • The electrically driven self-guided aluminum assemblies have a


• Bases require 120 Volt, 60 Hz. power. A height control box with rocker switch and a 91/2' power cord are supplied. Amp Draw: 4 Amps.

• Available with leveling glides or 3" polypropylene locking casters.• Gross dynamic load capacity 750 lbs. evenly distributed.• Shipped fully assembled. Control boxes field installed to surfaces.• ETL recognized; conforms to UL Std. 962 and certified to CSA Std.

C22.2 No. 68.

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS

TBERG36A glides / 24" & 30" deep surfaces 351/2 [902] 231/2 [597] 83 [38] TBERG48A glides / 24" & 30" deep surfaces 471/2 [1207] 231/2 [597] 86 [39]TBERG60A glides / 24" & 30" deep surfaces 591/2 [1511] 231/2 [597] 91 [41]TBERG72A glides / 24" & 30" deep surfaces 711/2 [1816] 231/2 [597] 94 [43]TBERG96A glides / 24" & 30" deep surfaces 951/2 [2387] 231/2 [597] 101 [46]TBERG3636A glides / 36" deep surfaces 351/2 [902] 321/8 [816] 83 [38]TBERG3648A glides / 36" deep surfaces 471/2 [1207] 321/8 [816] 86 [39]TBERG3660A glides / 36" deep surfaces 591/2 [1511] 321/8 [816] 91 [41]TBERG3672A glides / 36" deep surfaces 711/2 [1816] 321/8 [816] 94 [43]TBERG3696A glides / 36" deep surfaces 951/2 [2387] 321/8 [816] 101 [46]TBERC36A casters / 24" & 30" deep surfaces 351/2 [902] 231/2 [597] 126 [57] TBERC48A casters / 24" & 30" deep surfaces 471/2 [1207] 231/2 [597] 130 [59] TBERC60A casters / 24" & 30" deep surfaces 591/2 [1511] 231/2 [597] 134 [61] TBERC72A casters / 24" & 30" deep surfaces 711/2 [1816] 231/2 [597] 137 [62] TBERC96A casters / 24" & 30" deep surfaces 951/2 [2387] 231/2 [597] 145 [66]TBERC3636A casters / 36" deep surfaces 351/2 [902] 341/8 [867] 126 [57] TBERC3648A casters / 36" deep surfaces 471/2 [1207] 341/8 [867] 130 [59] TBERC3660A casters / 36" deep surfaces 591/2 [1511] 341/8 [867] 134 [60]TBERC3672A casters / 36" deep surfaces 711/2 [1816] 341/8 [867] 137 [62] TBERC3696A casters / 36" deep surfaces 951/2 [2387] 341/8 [867] 145 [66]


TBERC TBERG



W

411/2

261/2

D


TAB

LESTABLE BASE - POSITIONABLE

NOTES • Surfaces sold separately; see Section 4.0. • Accessories greater than 12" deep cannot be mounted to 24" deep Ultra Surfaces when mounted to Table Bases. 30" and

36" deep surfaces are limited to 18" and 24" deep accessories respectively.

Rev. 01.01.15

DESCRIPTION • The self-guided aluminum assemblies have a 15" travel range from


• Available with leveling glides or 3" polypropylene locking casters.• Dissipative bases each include two Ground Chains.• Load capacity 750 lbs. evenly distributed.• Shipped fully assembled. • ETL recognized; conforms to UL Std. 962 and certified to CSA Std.

C22.2 No. 68.

Product Width Depth WeightNumber Description in. [mm] in. [mm] lb. [kg]TBPRG36W glides / 24" & 30" deep surfaces 351/2 [902] 231/2 [597] 68 [31] TBPRG48W glides / 24" & 30" deep surfaces 471/2 [1207] 231/2 [597] 72 [33]TBPRG60W glides / 24" & 30" deep surfaces 591/2 [1511] 231/2 [597] 75 [34]TBPRG72W glides / 24" & 30" deep surfaces 711/2 [1816] 231/2 [597] 78 [36]TBPRG96W glides / 24" & 30" deep surfaces 951/2 [2387] 231/2 [597] 85 [39]TBPRG3636W glides / 36" deep surfaces 351/2 [902] 321/8 [816] 68 [31]TBPRG3648W glides / 36" deep surfaces 471/2 [1207] 321/8 [816] 72 [33]TBPRG3660W glides / 36" deep surfaces 591/2 [1511] 321/8 [816] 75 [34]TBPRG3672W glides / 36" deep surfaces 711/2 [1816] 321/8 [816] 78 [36]TBPRG3696W glides / 36" deep surfaces 951/2 [2387] 321/8 [816] 85 [39] TBPRC36W casters / 24" & 30" deep surfaces 351/2 [902] 231/2 [597] 111 [50] TBPRC48W casters / 24" & 30" deep surfaces 471/2 [1207] 231/2 [597] 115 [52] TBPRC60W casters / 24" & 30" deep surfaces 591/2 [1511] 231/2 [597] 119 [54] TBPRC72W casters / 24" & 30" deep surfaces 711/2 [1816] 231/2 [597] 122 [56]TBPRC96W casters / 24" & 30" deep surfaces 951/2 [2387] 231/2 [597] 129 [59] TBPRC3636W casters / 36" deep surfaces 351/2 [902] 341/8 [867] 111 [51] TBPRC3648W casters / 36" deep surfaces 471/2 [1207] 341/8 [867] 115 [52] TBPRC3660W casters / 36" deep surfaces 591/2 [1511] 341/8 [867] 119 [54]TBPRC3672W casters / 36" deep surfaces 711/2 [1816] 341/8 [867] 122 [56] TBPRC3696W casters / 36" deep surfaces 951/2 [2387] 341/8 [867] 129 [59]

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS

TBPRGTBPRC



411/2

261/2

D

W


TAB

LES

ERGOSTAT® FOOTREST


NOTES • Footrests will not attach to

UltraFrames or Table Bases.• WorkTable Bases each

accommodate an ErgoStat Footrest per side.

• Field drilling of holes in feet is required for installation.

Rev. 11.06.12

DESCRIPTION • Footrests support legs and feet when sitting or standing.• Footrests bolt to ErgoStat and WorkTable Bases with glides or

casters.• Aluminum bars manually adjust forward or back to accommodate

sitting or standing and include end caps.• Finish is Black.

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS

FRE36BB glides 21/2 [64] 291/2 [749]FRE48BB glides 21/2 [64] 411/2 [1054]FRE60BB glides 21/2 [64] 531/2 [1359]FRE72BB glides 21/2 [64] 651/2 [1664]FREC36BB casters 21/2 [64] 171/2 [445]FREC48BB casters 21/2 [64] 291/2 [749]FREC60BB casters 21/2 [64] 411/2 [1054]FREC72BB casters 21/2 [64] 531/2 [1359]FREC96BB casters 21/2 [64] 771/2 [1969]

Product Height WidthNumber Description in [mm] in. [mm]

FRE FREC

81/2

15

W

H

91/2

15


TAB

LESLOWER SHELF - TABLE, WORKTABLE, ERGOSTAT®

Rev. 11.29.12

W

D

H

DESCRIPTION • Lower shelf provides general storage below work surface on Table,

WorkTable and ErgoStat bases.• Mounts on glide or caster bases.• Works well for storing equipment, reagent supplies or heavy boxes.• The LES and LTS include two lock-down tabs and a shelf with a 1/2"

raised edge that is positioned in the back. • The LWS includes four lock-down tabs without a raised edge allowing

access from either side.• No hardware or tools are needed for assembly.• Load capacity 200 lbs. evenly distributed.

Product Depth Height Width WeightNumber Description in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] lb. [kg] LTS48 Table 16 [406] 11/2 [38] 42 [1007] 22 [10]LTS60 Table 16 [406] 11/2 [38] 54 [1372] 27 [12]LTS72 Table 16 [406] 11/2 [38] 66 [1676] 32 [15]LES48 ErgoStat 18 [457] 11/2 [38] 36 [914] 19 [9]LES60 ErgoStat 18 [457] 11/2 [38] 48 [1219] 24 [11]LES72 ErgoStat 18 [457] 11/2 [38] 60 [1524] 30 [14]LWS48 WorkTable 24 [610] 1 [25] 36 [914] 19 [9]LWS72 WorkTable 24 [610] 1 [25] 60 [1524] 32 [15]

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS

LES

TO ORDER, SPECIFY:1) Product Number2) Finish Standard or Dissipative Standard Finishes: BK Black BT Black Texture* GL Grey Light Smooth GT Grey Light Texture* NW Neutral White ST Sand Texture* * Paint upcharge applies


TAB

LES

ELECTRIC BASE HAND CONTROL

DESCRIPTION • Optional hand control switches are available to replace the standard

Symbiote switch already included with electric ErgoStat, Table and WorkTable bases.

• Switches feature memory settings, digital feedback display and/or various mounting options.

• Finish is Black. • This product is UL/CUL (US and Canada) recognized under UL962, File

#E320513.


DCSWDP1CDP1K DP1U

DPAK0 DPBK0

DPF1C

DPF1K DPF1M

DPHIK DPTIC

NOTES • Switches have extended lead time.

Rev. 12.22.10

DP1K push-button, box mount 1 [0.53]DP1C push-button, 3 memory settings, digital display, box mount 1 [0.53]DP1U push-button, 3 memory settings, box mount 1 [0.53]DCSW standard Symbiote switchbox 1 [0.53]DPAK0 push-button, hinged mount 1 [0.53]DPBK0 push-button, angled mount 1 [0.53]DPF1K rocker switch, bracket mount 1 [0.53]DPF1M rocker switch, 3 memory settings, bracket mount 1 [0.53]DPF1C rocker switch, 3 memory settings, digital display, bracket mount 1 [0.53]DPH1K push-button, flush counterbore surface mount 1 [0.53]DPT1C touch panel, 3 memory settings, digital display, flush counterbore surface mount 1 [0.53]


TAB

LES4-LEGGED TABLE - GLIDES

Rev. 11.22.11

DESCRIPTION • Height adjustable 4-Legged Table with leveling glides.• Table has a 14" travel range measuring 261/8" to 401/8" from the floor to

the bottom of the work surface. • Table can be used with any rectangular surface.• Heavy-duty welded steel front and back frame construction.• Ships knocked down and is easily assembled with gusset plates.• Lower side leg cross-bar for added strength and stability.• Adjusts in 1" increments with threaded fasteners. • Load capacity 1,000 lbs. evenly distributed.

NOTES • Lower Shelves available; page 3.15.• WorkTops sold separately; see section

4.0.• Tables can be used in conjunction with

Surface Accessory Brackets; page 4.30.

FLPG

TO ORDER, SPECIFY:1) Product Number2) Finish Standard Finishes: BK Black BT Black Texture* GL Grey Light Smooth GT Grey Light Texture* NW Neutral White ST Sand Texture*


SIDEFRONT

W

D

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS Product Width Depth WeightNumber in. [mm] in. [mm] lb. [kg]FLPG2448 443/4 [1137] 203/4 [476] 59 [27]FLPG2460 563/4 [1441] 203/4 [476] 63 [29]FLPG2472 683/4 [1746] 203/4 [476] 67 [30]FLPG2496 923/4 [2356] 203/4 [476] 75 [34]FLPG3048 443/4 [1137] 263/4 [680] 61 [27]FLPG3060 563/4 [1441] 263/4 [680] 66 [30]FLPG3072 683/4 [1746] 263/4 [680] 70 [32]FLPG3096 923/4 [2356] 263/4 [680] 78 [35]FLPG3648 443/4 [1137] 323/4 [832] 64 [29]FLPG3660 563/4 [1441] 323/4 [832] 68 [31]FLPG3672 683/4 [1746] 323/4 [832] 72 [33]FLPG3696 923/4 [2356] 323/4 [832] 81 [37]

401/8261/8


TAB

LES

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS Product Width Depth WeightNumber in. [mm] in. [mm] lb. [kg]FLPC2448 443/4 [1137] 203/4 [476] 65 [29]FLPC2460 563/4 [1441] 203/4 [476] 69 [31]FLPC2472 683/4 [1746] 203/4 [476] 73 [33]FLPC2496 923/4 [2356] 203/4 [476] 81 [67]FLPC3048 443/4 [1137] 263/4 [680] 67 [30]FLPC3060 563/4 [1441] 263/4 [680] 72 [33]FLPC3072 683/4 [1746] 263/4 [680] 76 [34]FLPC3096 923/4 [2356] 263/4 [680] 84 [38]FLPC3648 443/4 [1137] 323/4 [832] 70 [32]FLPC3660 563/4 [1441] 323/4 [832] 74 [34]FLPC3672 683/4 [1746] 323/4 [832] 78 [35]FLPC3696 923/4 [2356] 323/4 [832] 87 [39]

DESCRIPTION • Height adjustable 4-Legged Table includes 4" polypropylene casters

with totalock brakes (simultaneously locks the swivel and wheel).• Table has a 14" travel range measuring 301/8" to 441/8" from the floor to

the bottom of the work surface. • Table can be used with any rectangular surface.• Heavy-duty welded steel front and back frame construction.• Ships knocked down and is easily assembled with gusset plates.• Lower side leg cross-bar for added strength and stability.• Adjusts in 1" increments with threaded fasteners. • Load capacity 880 lbs. evenly distributed.

NOTES • Lower Shelves available; see

page 3.15.• Surfaces sold separately; see

section 4.0.• Tables can be used in conjunction

with Surface Accessory Brackets; see page 4.30.

TO ORDER, SPECIFY:1) Product Number2) Finish Standard Finishes: BK Black BT Black Texture* GL Grey Light Smooth GT Grey Light Texture* NW Neutral White ST Sand Texture*


FLPC

SIDEFRONT

W D

4-LEGGED TABLE - CASTERS

Rev. 11.22.11

44 /1 8

30 /1 8


TAB

LES

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS

NOTES • Lower Shelf is not designed to work with Ergostat,

WorkTable or Table Bases.• Half depth Lower Shelf option is not available for 24"

deep 4-LeggedTables.

DESCRIPTION • A 11/4" high laminate Lower Shelf provides general storage below the

work surface on glide or caster 4-Legged Table bases.• Available in full or half depth sizes.• Load capacity for the half size Lower Shelf is 100 lbs. evenly

distributed.• Load capacity for the full size Lower Shelf is 200 lbs. evenly

distributed.• Lower Shelf attaches to the 4-Legged Table support bars with hook

and loop strips.• Lower Shelves have square corners with matching edge band.

FLSLF

WH

D

4-LEGGED TABLE - LOWER SHELF

Rev. 12.23.11

TO ORDER, SPECIFY:1) Product Number2) Laminate Standard or Chemsurf Standard Laminates: BK Black GF Grey Fleck GL Grey Light NW Neutral White SA Sand SF Sand Fleck WF White Fleck Chemsurf Laminates: CBK Black CGL Grey Light CNW Neutral White

Product Height Width Depth WeightNumber Description in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] lb. [kg]FLSLH3048 half depth 11/4 [38] 44 [1118] 11 [279] 19 [8]FLSLH3060 half depth 11/4 [38] 56 [1422] 11 [279] 23 [10]FLSLH3072 half depth 11/4 [38] 68 [1727] 11 [279] 27 [12]FLSLH3648 half depth 11/4 [38] 44 [1118] 14 [356] 23 [10]FLSLH3660 half depth 11/4 [38] 56 [1422] 14 [356] 29 [13]FLSLH3672 half depth 11/4 [38] 68 [1727] 14 [356] 36 [16]FLSLF2448 full depth 11/4 [38] 44 [1118] 16 [406] 26 [11]FLSLF2460 full depth 11/4 [38] 56 [1422] 16 [406] 34 [15]FLSLF2472 full depth 11/4 [38] 68 [1727] 16 [406] 40 [18]FLSLF3048 full depth 11/4 [38] 44 [1118] 22 [559] 38 [17]FLSLF3060 full depth 11/4 [38] 56 [1422] 22 [559] 46 [21]FLSLF3072 full depth 11/4 [38] 68 [1727] 22 [559] 54 [24]FLSLF3648 full depth 11/4 [38] 44 [1118] 28 [711] 46 [21]FLSLF3660 full depth 11/4 [38] 56 [1422] 28 [711] 58 [26]FLSLF3672 full depth 11/4 [38] 68 [1727] 28 [711] 72 [33]



2015

4.1

WO

RK

SUR

FAC

ES &

SUP

PO

RT

S

WORK SURFACES & SUPPORTSWORK SURFACES & SUPPORTSwww.symbiote.com 800.283.2434 www.symbiote.com 800.283.2434

4WORK SURFACES & SUPPORTS Ultra Surface Standard Laminate

Dissipative Laminate

Chemsurf® Laminate

Hardwood

Stainless Steel

Phenolic System Top

Work Surface Standard Laminate


Chemsurf Laminate

WorkTop Standard Laminate


Chemsurf Laminate

Hardwood

Supports Surface B Support Brackets

Surface Cantilever Supports

Frame Mount Surface Supports

Surface Reinforcement Bars

Surface Accessory Brackets

Surface Back Stops

Phenolic Backsplashes

Gap Fillers

Custom Custom and Auxiliary Work Surfaces

4.24.54.84.114.124.134.144.174.214.234.244.254.264.274.284.294.304.314.324.334.344.36

SECTION 4

4.2

WO

RK

SU

RFA

CE

S &

SU

PP

OR

TS

AN

D


NOTES • Surface supports sold separately; see pages 4.26 - 4.28.• Corner surfaces ship with one corner bracket. Left and right-side supports must be ordered separately; see pages 4.26 - 4.28.• 72" and 96" wide frame-mounted surfaces must be supported in the center by Surface Cantilever Supports. Specify one 18" cantilever per 24" and 30" deep surface and one 24" cantilever per 36" deep surface.

Rev. 10.28.11

UCLS

ULS

TOP

D

UCLS

TOP

SIDE

D

ULS

DESCRIPTION • 11/4" high laminate surfaces mount to ErgoStats®, Table Bases, UltraFrames and Panels.• Surfaces have square corners with matching Edge-band.• Corner surfaces each include one corner bracket.• Surfaces are predrilled for supports and most accessories.• Load capacity 500 lbs. evenly distributed.

TO ORDER, SPECIFY: 1) Product Number 2) Laminate Standard Standard Laminates: BK GF GL NW SA SF WF

BlackGrey Fleck Grey Light Neutral WhiteSandSand FleckWhite Fleck

ULTRA SURFACES - STANDARD LAMINATE SQUARE CORNERS

D

W W

H

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS Product Height Width Depth WeightNumber Description in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] lb. [kg] ULS2424 rectangular 11/4 [32] 24 [610] 24 [610] 22 [10]ULS2430 rectangular 11/4 [32] 30 [762] 24 [610] 24 [11]ULS2436 rectangular 11/4 [32] 36 [914] 24 [610] 29 [13]ULS2448 rectangular 11/4 [32] 48 [1219] 24 [610] 36 [16]ULS2460 rectangular 11/4 [32] 60 [1524] 24 [610] 45 [20]ULS2472 rectangular 11/4 [32] 72 [1829] 24 [610] 54 [24]ULS2496 rectangular 11/4 [32] 96 [2438] 24 [610] 72 [33]ULS3024 rectangular 11/4 [32] 24 [610] 30 [762] 24 [11]ULS3030 rectangular 11/4 [32] 30 [762] 30 [762] 30 [14]ULS3036 rectangular 11/4 [32] 36 [914] 30 [762] 36 [16]ULS3048 rectangular 11/4 [32] 48 [1219] 30 [762] 45 [20]ULS3060 rectangular 11/4 [32] 60 [1524] 30 [762] 56 [25]ULS3072 rectangular 11/4 [32] 72 [1829] 30 [762] 67 [30]ULS3096 rectangular 11/4 [32] 96 [2438] 30 [762] 90 [41]ULS3624 rectangular 11/4 [32] 24 [610] 30 [762] 26 [12]ULS3630 rectangular 11/4 [32] 30 [762] 36 [914] 36 [16]ULS3636 rectangular 11/4 [32] 36 [914] 36 [914] 43 [20]ULS3648 rectangular 11/4 [32] 48 [1219] 36 [914] 54 [24]ULS3660 rectangular 11/4 [32] 60 [1524] 36 [914] 67 [30]ULS3672 rectangular 11/4 [32] 72 [1829] 36 [914] 80 [36]ULS3696 rectangular 11/4 [32] 96 [2438] 36 [914] 108 [49]UCLS2448 corner 11/4 [32] 48 [1219] 24 [610] 72 [33]UCLS3048 corner 11/4 [32] 48 [1219] 30 [762] 74 [34]UCLS3648 corner 11/4 [32] 48 [1219] 36 [914] 78 [35]

HSIDE

4.3

WO

RK

SUR

FAC

ES &

SUP

PO

RT

S


ULTRA SURFACES - STANDARD LAMINATE FULL-ROUND EDGE

DESCRIPTION • 11/4" high laminate surfaces mount to ErgoStats®, Table Bases, UltraFrames and Panels.• Surfaces have matching vinyl Full-round front edges with Edge-band on the back and side edges.• Corner surfaces each include one corner bracket.• Surfaces are predrilled for supports and most accessories.• Load capacity 500 lbs. evenly distributed.

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS Product Height Width Depth WeightNumber Description in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] lb. [kg] ULR2424 rectangular 11/4 [32] 24 [610] 24 [610] 22 [10]ULR2430 rectangular 11/4 [32] 30 [762] 24 [610] 24 [11]ULR2436 rectangular 11/4 [32] 36 [914] 24 [610] 29 [13]ULR2448 rectangular 11/4 [32] 48 [1219] 24 [610] 36 [16]ULR2460 rectangular 11/4 [32] 60 [1524] 24 [610] 45 [20]ULR2472 rectangular 11/4 [32] 72 [1829] 24 [610] 54 [24]ULR2496 rectangular 11/4 [32] 96 [2438] 24 [610] 72 [33]ULR3024 rectangular 11/4 [32] 24 [610] 30 [762] 24 [11]ULR3030 rectangular 11/4 [32] 30 [762] 30 [762] 30 [14]ULR3036 rectangular 11/4 [32] 36 [914] 30 [762] 36 [16]ULR3048 rectangular 11/4 [32] 48 [1219] 30 [762] 45 [20]ULR3060 rectangular 11/4 [32] 60 [1524] 30 [762] 56 [25]ULR3072 rectangular 11/4 [32] 72 [1829] 30 [762] 67 [30]ULR3096 rectangular 11/4 [32] 96 [2438] 30 [762] 90 [41]ULR3624 rectangular 11/4 [32] 24 [610] 30 [762] 26 [12]ULR3630 rectangular 11/4 [32] 30 [762] 36 [914] 36 [16]ULR3636 rectangular 11/4 [32] 36 [914] 36 [914] 43 [20]ULR3648 rectangular 11/4 [32] 48 [1219] 36 [914] 54 [24]ULR3660 rectangular 11/4 [32] 60 [1524] 36 [914] 67 [30]ULR3672 rectangular 11/4 [32] 72 [1829] 36 [914] 80 [36]ULR3696 rectangular 11/4 [32] 96 [2438] 36 [914] 108 [49]UCLR2448 corner 11/4 [32] 48 [1219] 24 [610] 72 [33]UCLR3048 corner 11/4 [32] 48 [1219] 30 [762] 74 [34]UCLR3648 corner 11/4 [32] 48 [1219] 36 [914] 78 [35]

ULR UCLR

ULRW

D

H

TOP

W

H

D

UCLR

SIDE

TOP

ULTRA SURFACES - STANDARD LAMINATE SQUARE CORNERS




WW

DD

Rev. 10.28.11

HSIDE

4.4

WO

RK

SU

RFA

CE

S &

SU

PP

OR

TS

AN

D


ULTRA SURFACE PENINSULAS - STANDARD LAMINATE

NOTES • Work Surface Stretcher Bars or Cantilever Supports are required to mount to UltraFrames or Panels. Surface B Support Brackets are required for attachment to C Legs. Order supports separately; see pages 4.26 - 4.28.• Link Plates are required to attach peninsulas directly to adjacent surfaces without the use of other surface supports. Finish is black only. Order separately; see below.• Ultra Surface Peninsulas are not predrilled for Task Drawers.

Rev. 01.29.09

DESCRIPTION • 11/4" high laminate surface assemblies mount to UltraFrames or Panels or attach to adjacent rectangular surfaces.• Peninsulas include matching Edge-band or Full-round edge. • Peninsulas each include a black 31/4" diameter leg with an adjustment range of 27" to 36" to the underside of the surfaces.• Peninsulas are predrilled for surface supports.• Load capacity 500 lbs. evenly distributed.

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS Product Height Width Depth WeightNumber Description in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] lb. [kg] UPLS3048 edge-band 11/4 [32] 48 [1219] 30 [762] 55 [25]UPLS3060 edge-band 11/4 [32] 60 [1524] 30 [762] 66 [30]UPLS3072 edge-band 11/4 [32] 72 [1829] 30 [762] 77 [35]UPLS3648 edge-band 11/4 [32] 48 [1219] 36 [914] 64 [49]UPLS3660 edge-band 11/4 [32] 60 [1524] 36 [914] 77 [35]UPLS3672 edge-band 11/4 [32] 72 [1829] 36 [914] 90 [41]UPLR3048 full-round 11/4 [32] 48 [1219] 30 [762] 55 [25]UPLR3060 full-round 11/4 [32] 60 [1524] 30 [762] 66 [30]UPLR3072 full-round 11/4 [32] 72 [1829] 30 [762] 77 [35]UPLR3648 full-round 11/4 [32] 48 [1219] 36 [914] 64 [41]UPLR3660 full-round 11/4 [32] 60 [1524] 36 [914] 77 [35]UPLR3672 full-round 1/4 [32] 72 [1829] 36 [914] 90 [41]PLEGBT peninsula leg 31/4 [83] 31/4 [83] 10 [5]LPLATE link plate 1/6 [4] 20 [508] 8 [203] 5 [2]

LPLATE

PLEG

TOP

SIDE

H

D

W



4.5

WO

RK

SUR

FAC

ES &

SUP

PO

RT

S


NOTES • Surface supports sold separately; see pages 4.26 - 4.28.• Corner surfaces ship with one corner bracket. Left and right-side supports must be ordered separately; see pages 4.26 - 4.28.• 72" and 96" wide frame-mounted surfaces must be supported in the center by Surface Cantilever Supports. Specify one 18" cantilever per 24" and 30" deep surface and one 24" cantilever per 36" deep surface.• Customers are responsible for specifying ESD surface requirements; corporate ESD standards must be consulted prior to ordering.

Rev. 02.26.10

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS Product Height Width Depth WeightNumber Description in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] lb. [kg] UDS2424 rectangular 11/4 [32] 24 [610] 24 [610] 22 [10]UDS2430 rectangular 11/4 [32] 30 [762] 24 [610] 24 [11]UDS2436 rectangular 11/4 [32] 36 [914] 24 [610] 29 [13]UDS2448 rectangular 11/4 [32] 48 [1219] 24 [610] 36 [16]UDS2460 rectangular 11/4 [32] 60 [1524] 24 [610] 45 [20]UDS2472 rectangular 11/4 [32] 72 [1829] 24 [610] 54 [24]UDS2496 rectangular 11/4 [32] 96 [2438] 24 [610] 72 [33]UDS3024 rectangular 11/4 [32] 24 [610] 30 [762] 24 [11]UDS3030 rectangular 11/4 [32] 30 [762] 30 [762] 30 [14]UDS3036 rectangular 11/4 [32] 36 [914] 30 [762] 36 [16]UDS3048 rectangular 11/4 [32] 48 [1219] 30 [762] 45 [20]UDS3060 rectangular 11/4 [32] 60 [1524] 30 [762] 56 [25]UDS3072 rectangular 11/4 [32] 72 [1829] 30 [762] 67 [30]UDS3096 rectangular 11/4 [32] 96 [2438] 30 [762] 90 [41]UDS3624 rectangular 11/4 [32] 24 [610] 30 [762] 26 [12]UDS3630 rectangular 11/4 [32] 30 [762] 36 [914] 36 [16]UDS3636 rectangular 11/4 [32] 36 [914] 36 [914] 43 [20]UDS3648 rectangular 11/4 [32] 48 [1219] 36 [914] 54 [24]UDS3660 rectangular 11/4 [32] 60 [1524] 36 [914] 67 [30]UDS3672 rectangular 11/4 [32] 72 [1829] 36 [914] 80 [36]UDS3696 rectangular 11/4 [32] 96 [2438] 36 [914] 108 [49]UCDS2448 corner 11/4 [32] 48 [1219] 24 [610] 72 [33]UCDS3048 corner 11/4 [32] 48 [1219] 30 [762] 74 [34]UCDS3648 corner 11/4 [32] 48 [1219] 36 [914] 78 [35]

DESCRIPTION • 11/4" high laminate surfaces mount to ErgoStats®, Table Bases, UltraFrames and Panels.• Symbiote dissipative surfaces are manufactured with Nevamar® Static Dissipative Laminates (SDL). Nevamar SDL is manufactured to have a point to point and point to ground resistance of 1 x 106 to 1 x 109 ohms @ 10-60% relative humidity. Nevamar Static Dissipative Laminates conform to ESD Association Standard ESD-S4.1.• Dissipative surfaces each include a Laminate Grounding Terminal Kit.• Surfaces have square corners with matching Edge-band.• Corner surfaces each include one corner bracket.• Surfaces are predrilled for supports and most accessories.• Load capacity 500 lbs. evenly distributed.

ULTRA SURFACES - DISSIPATIVE LAMINATE SQUARE CORNERS

TO ORDER, SPECIFY: 1) Product Number 2) Laminate Dissipative Dissipative Laminates: DBK DG DNW DS

Dissipative BlackDissipative GreyDissipative Neutral White Dissipative Sand

UDS

TOP

W

D

UCDSUDSH

UCDS

TOP

SIDE

W

D

W

D

W

D

D

Rev. 10.28.11

HSIDE

4.6

WO

RK

SU

RFA

CE

S &

SU

PP

OR

TS

AN

D


NOTES • Surface supports sold separately; see pages 4.26 - 4.28.• Corner surfaces ship with one corner bracket. Left and right side supports must be ordered separately; see pages 4.26 - 4.28.• 72" and 96" wide frame-mounted surfaces must be supported in the center by Surface Cantilever Supports. Specify one 18" cantilever per 24" and 30" deep surface and one 24" cantilever per 36" deep surface.• Customers are responsible for specifying ESD surface requirements; corporate ESD standards must be consulted prior to ordering.

Rev. 07.22.10

ULTRA SURFACES - DISSIPATIVE LAMINATE FULL-ROUND EDGE

DESCRIPTION • 11/4" high laminate surfaces mount to ErgoStats®, Table Bases, UltraFrames and Panels.• Symbiote dissipative surfaces are manufactured with Nevamar® Static Dissipative Laminates (SDL). Nevamar SDL is manufactured to have a point to point and point to ground resistance of 1 x 106 to 1 x 109 ohms @ 10-60% relative humidity. Nevamar Static Dissipative Laminates conform to ESD Association Standard ESD-S4.1.• Dissipative surfaces each include a Laminate Grounding Terminal Kit.• Surfaces have matching vinyl Full-round front edges with Edge-band on the back and side edges.• Corner surfaces each include one corner bracket.• Surfaces are predrilled for supports and most accessories.• Load capacity 500 lbs. evenly distributed.

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS Product Height Width Depth WeightNumber Description in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] lb. [kg] UDR2424 rectangular 11/4 [32] 24 [610] 24 [610] 22 [10]UDR2430 rectangular 11/4 [32] 30 [762] 24 [610] 24 [11]UDR2436 rectangular 11/4 [32] 36 [914] 24 [610] 29 [13]UDR2448 rectangular 11/4 [32] 48 [1219] 24 [610] 36 [16]UDR2460 rectangular 11/4 [32] 60 [1524] 24 [610] 45 [20]UDR2472 rectangular 11/4 [32] 72 [1829] 24 [610] 54 [24]UDR2496 rectangular 11/4 [32] 96 [2438] 24 [610] 72 [33]UDR3024 rectangular 11/4 [32] 24 [610] 30 [762] 24 [11]UDR3030 rectangular 11/4 [32] 30 [762] 30 [762] 30 [14]UDR3036 rectangular 11/4 [32] 36 [914] 30 [762] 36 [16]UDR3048 rectangular 11/4 [32] 48 [1219] 30 [762] 45 [20]UDR3060 rectangular 11/4 [32] 60 [1524] 30 [762] 56 [25]UDR3072 rectangular 11/4 [32] 72 [1829] 30 [762] 67 [30]UDR3096 rectangular 11/4 [32] 96 [2438] 30 [762] 90 [41]UDR3624 rectangular 11/4 [32] 24 [610] 30 [762] 26 [12]UDR3630 rectangular 11/4 [32] 30 [762] 36 [914] 36 [16]UDR3636 rectangular 11/4 [32] 36 [914] 36 [914] 43 [20]UDR3648 rectangular 11/4 [32] 48 [1219] 36 [914] 54 [24]UDR3660 rectangular 11/4 [32] 60 [1524] 36 [914] 67 [30]UDR3672 rectangular 11/4 [32] 72 [1829] 36 [914] 80 [36]UDR3696 rectangular 11/4 [32] 96 [2438] 36 [914] 108 [49]UCDR2448 corner 11/4 [32] 48 [1219] 24 [610] 72 [33]UCDR3048 corner 11/4 [32] 48 [1219] 30 [762] 74 [34]UCDR3648 corner 11/4 [32] 48 [1219] 36 [914] 78 [35]



UDR UCDR

UDRW

D

H

TOP

W

H

D

UCDR

SIDE

TOP

W

D D

W

Rev. 10.28.11

HSIDE

4.7

WO

RK

SUR

FAC

ES &

SUP

PO

RT

S


NOTES • Work Surface Stretcher Bars or Cantilever Supports are required to mount to UltraFrames or Panels. Surface B Support Brackets are required for attachment to C Legs. Order supports separately; see pages 4.26 - 4.28.• Link Plates are required to attach peninsulas directly to adjacent surfaces without the use of other surface supports. Finish is black only. Order separately; see below.• Ultra Surface Peninsulas are not predrilled for Task Drawers.• Customers are responsible for specifying ESD surface requirements; corporate ESD standards must be consulted prior to ordering.

Rev. 01.29.09

ULTRA SURFACE PENINSULAS - DISSIPATIVE LAMINATE

DESCRIPTION • 11/4" high laminate surface assemblies mount to UltraFrames or Panels or attach to adjacent rectangular surfaces.• Symbiote dissipative surfaces are manufactured with Nevamar® Static Dissipative Laminates (SDL). Nevamar SDL is manufactured to have a point to point and point to ground resistance of 1 x 106 to 1 x 109 ohms @ 10-60% relative humidity. Nevamar Static Dissipative Laminates conform to ESD Association Standard ESD-S4.1.• Dissipative peninsulas each include a Laminate Grounding Terminal Kit.• Peninsulas include matching Edge-band or Full-round edge. • Peninsulas each include a black 31/4" diameter leg with an adjustment range from 27" to 36" to the underside of the surfaces.• Peninsulas are predrilled for surface supports.• Load capacity 500 lbs. evenly distributed.

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS Product Height Width Depth WeightNumber Description in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] lb. [kg] UPDS3048 edge-band 11/4 [32] 48 [1219] 30 [762] 55 [25]UPDS3060 edge-band 11/4 [32] 60 [1524] 30 [762] 66 [30]UPDS3072 edge-band 11/4 [32] 72 [1829] 30 [762] 77 [35]UPDS3648 edge-band 11/4 [32] 48 [1219] 36 [914] 64 [29]UPDS3660 edge-band 11/4 [32] 60 [1524] 36 [914] 77 [35]UPDS3672 edge-band 11/4 [32] 72 [1829] 36 [914] 90 [41]UPDR3048 full-round 11/4 [32] 48 [1219] 30 [762] 55 [25]UPDR3060 full-round 11/4 [32] 60 [1524] 30 [762] 66 [30]UPDR3072 full-round 11/4 [32] 72 [1829] 30 [762] 77 [35]UPDR3648 full-round 11/4 [32] 48 [1219] 36 [914] 64 [29]UPDR3660 full-round 11/4 [32] 60 [1524] 36 [914] 77 [35]UPDR3672 full-round 11/4 [32] 72 [1829] 36 [914] 90 [41]PLEGBT peninsula leg 31/4 [83] 31/4 [83] 10 [5]LPLATE link plate 1/6 [4] 20 [508] 8 [203] 5 [2]

TOP

PLEG

LPLATE

SIDEH

D

W



Rev. 10.28.11

4.8

WO

RK

SU

RFA

CE

S &

SU

PP

OR

TS

AN

D


DESCRIPTION • 11/4" high laminate surfaces mount to ErgoStats®, Table Bases, UltraFrames and Panels.• Chemsurf laminate is a Wilsonart product specifically designed for highly corrosive environments. Chemsurf provides exceptional chemical and wear resistance. Reference Wilsonart's website.• Surfaces have square corners with matching Edge-band.• Corner surfaces each include one corner bracket.• Surfaces are predrilled for supports and most accessories.• Load capacity 500 lbs. evenly distributed.

TO ORDER, SPECIFY:1) Product Number2) Laminate Chemsurf Chemsurf Laminates: CBK Black CGL Grey Light CNW Neutral White


PRODUCT DIMENSIONS Product Height Width Depth WeightNumber Description in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] lb. [kg] UCS2424 rectangular 11/4 [32]UCS2430 rectangular 11/4 [32]UCS2436 rectangular 11/4 [32]UCS2448 rectangular 11/4 [32]UCS2460 rectangular 11/4 [32]UCS2472 rectangular 11/4 [32]UCS2496 rectangular 11/4 [32]UCS3024 rectangular 11/4 [32]UCS3030 rectangular 11/4 [32]UCS3036 rectangular 11/4 [32]UCS3048 rectangular 11/4 [32]UCS3060 rectangular 11/4 [32]UCS3072 rectangular 11/4 [32]UCS3096 rectangular 11/4 [32]UCS3624 rectangular 11/4 [32]UCS3630 rectangular 11/4 [32]UCS3636 rectangular 11/4 [32]UCS3648 rectangular 11/4 [32]UCS3660 rectangular 11/4 [32]UCS3672 rectangular 11/4 [32]UCS3696 rectangular 11/4 [32]UCCS2448 corner 11/4 [32]UCCS3048 corner 11/4 [32]UCCS3648 corner 11/4 [32]

24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]48 [1219]48 [1219]48 [1219]

24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]

22 [10]24 [11]29 [13]36 [16]45 [20]54 [24]72 [33]24 [11]30 [14]36 [16]45 [20]56 [25]67 [30]90 [41]26 [12]36 [16]43 [20]54 [24]67 [30]80 [36]108 [49]72 [33]74 [34]78 [35]

Rev. 01.29.09

ULTRA SURFACES - CHEMSURF LAMINATE SQUARE CORNERS

UCCS

UCS

TOP

W

D

H

H

UCCS

TOP

SIDE

W

D

UCS

W

D

W

D

Rev. 10.28.11

HSIDE

http://www.wilsonart.com/commercial/laminates/specialty

4.9

WO

RK

SUR

FAC

ES &

SUP

PO

RT

S

WORK SURFACES & SUPPORTSWORK SURFACES & SUPPORTSwww.symbiote.com 800.283.2434 www.symbiote.com 800.283.2434Rev. 01.29.09

ULTRA SURFACES - CHEMSURF LAMINATE FULL-ROUND EDGE

DESCRIPTION • 11/4" high laminate surfaces mount to ErgoStats®, Table Bases, UltraFrames and Panels.• Chemsurf laminate is a Wilsonart product specifically designed for highly corrosive environments. Chemsurf provides exceptional chemical and wear resistance. Reference Wilsonart's website.• Surfaces have matching vinyl Full-round front edges with Edge-band on the back and side edges.• Corner surfaces each include one corner bracket.• Surfaces are predrilled for supports and most accessories.• Load capacity 500 lbs. evenly distributed.



PRODUCT DIMENSIONS Product Height Width Depth WeightNumber Description in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] lb. [kg] UCR2424UCR2430UCR2436UCR2448UCR2460UCR2472UCR2496 UCR3024UCR3030UCR3036UCR3048 UCR3060UCR3072UCR3096UCR3624UCR3630UCR3636UCR3648UCR3660UCR3672UCR3696UCCR2448UCCR3048 UCCR3648

rectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularcornercornercorner

11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]

24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]48 [1219]48 [1219]48 [1219]

24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]

22 [10]24 [11]29 [13]36 [16]45 [20]54 [24]72 [33]24 [11]30 [14]36 [16]45 [20]56 [25]67 [30]90 [41]26 [12]36 [16]43 [20]54 [24]67 [30]80 [36]108 [49]72 [33]74 [34]78 [35]

UCR UCCR

UCRW

D

H

TOP

W

H

D

UCCR

SIDE

TOP

W

D D

Rev. 10.28.11

HSIDE


4.10

WO

RK

SU

RFA

CE

S &

SU

PP

OR

TS

AN

D


ULTRA SURFACE PENINSULAS - Chemsurf® LAMINATE

DESCRIPTION • 11/4" high laminate surface assemblies mount to UltraFrames or Panels or attach to adjacent rectangular surfaces.• Chemsurf laminate is a Wilsonart product specifically designed for highly corrosive environments. Chemsurf provides exceptional chemical and wear resistance. Reference Wilsonart's website.• Peninsulas include matching Edge-band or Full-round edge. • Peninsulas each include a black 31/4" diameter leg with an adjustment range of 27" to 36" to the underside of the surfaces.• Peninsulas are predrilled for surface supports.• Load capacity 500 lbs. evenly distributed.


NOTES • Work Surface Stretcher Bars or Cantilever Supports are required to mount to UltraFrames or Panels. Surface B Support Brackets are required for attachment to C Legs. Order supports separately; see pages 4.26 - 4.28.• Link Plates are required to attach peninsulas directly to adjacent surfaces without the use of other surface supports. Finish is black only. Order separately; see below.• Ultra Surface Peninsulas are not predrilled for Task Drawers.

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS Product Height Width Depth WeightNumber Description in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] lb. [kg] UPCS3048 UPCS3060UPCS3072UPCS3648UPCS3660UPCS3672UPCR3048UPCR3060UPCR3072 UPCR3648UPCR3660UPCR3672 PLEGBTLPLATE

edge-bandedge-bandedge-bandedge-bandedge-bandedge-bandfull-roundfull-roundfull-roundfull-round full-roundfull-roundpeninsula leglink plate

11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]

11/6 [4]

48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]31/4 [83] 20 [508]

30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]31/4 [83] 8 [203]

55 [25]66 [30]77 [35]64 [29]77 [35]90 [41]55 [25]66 [30]77 [35]64 [29]77 [35]90 [41]10 [5]5 [2]

TOP

PLEG

LPLATE

SIDEH

D

W

Rev. 10.28.11


4.11

WO

RK

SUR

FAC

ES &

SUP

PO

RT

S


ULTRA SURFACE - HARDWOOD


NOTES • Surface supports sold separately; see pages 4.26 - 4.28.• Corner surfaces ship with one corner bracket. Left and right-side supports must be ordered separately; see pages 4.26 - 4.28.• 72" and 96" wide frame-mounted surfaces must be supported in the center by Surface Cantilever Supports. Specify one 18" cantilever per 30" deep surface and one 24" cantilever per 36" deep surface.

DESCRIPTION • 11/4" high hardwood surfaces mount to ErgoStats®, Table Bases, UltraFrames and Panels.• Surfaces consist of kiln-dried hardwood strips face glued, sanded smooth and finished with a two coat catalyzed varnish.• Surfaces have a full radius edge with square-edged backs and sides.• Corner surfaces each include one corner bracket.• Surfaces are predrilled for supports and most accessories.• Load capacity 500 lbs. evenly distributed.


rectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularcornercorner

11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]

24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]48 [1219]48 [1219]

30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]30 [762]36 [914]

25 [11]31 [14]38 [17]50 [23]63 [29]75 [34]100 [45]45 [20]60 [27]75 [34]90 [41]120 [54]74 [34]78 [35]

SMR3024CCSMR3030CCSMR3036CCSMR3048CCSMR3060CCSMR3072CCSMR3096CCSMR3636CCSMR3648CCSMR3660CCSMR3672CCSMR3696CCSMCR3048CCSMCR3648CC

SMR SMCR

SMR

TOP

SMCRW

D

Rev. 04.16.15

D

W

SIDE

TOPH

HSIDE

4.12

WO

RK

SU

RFA

CE

S &

SU

PP

OR

TS

AN

D


DESCRIPTION • Provides durable work surface for areas where high abrasion, chemical resistance and sterilization are required.• Surfaces are manufactured using 16 gauge stainless steel with a #4 brush finish.• Surface is constructed of a stainless steel "cap" (tops and sides are formed from one sheet of steel with welded corners) assembled to a core which is laminated with backer material. The joint between the cap and core is sealed around the full perimeter.• Load capacity 500 lbs. evenly distributed.

NOTES • Surface supports sold separately; see pages 4.26 - 4.28.• 72" and 96" wide frame-mounted surfaces must be supported in the center by a Surface Cantilever Support. Specify one 18" cantilever per 24" and 30" deep surface and one 24" cantilever per 36" deep surface.• Also mounts to a worktable base.

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS Product Height Width Depth WeightNumber Description in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] lb. [kg] USC3048USC3060USC3072USC3648USC3660USC3672

rectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularrectangular

11/8 [29] 11/8 [29] 11/8 [29] 11/8 [29] 11/8 [29] 11/8 [29]

48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]

30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]

74 [34]92 [42]110 [50]88 [40]110 [50]132 [60]

ULTRA SURFACES - STAINLESS STEEL


USC

TOP

SIDE

D

W

H

4.13

WO

RK

SUR

FAC

ES &

SUP

PO

RT

S



NOTES • Surface supports sold separately; see pages 4.26 - 4.28.• 72" and 96" wide frame-mounted surfaces must be supported in the center by Surface Cantilever Supports. Specify one 18" cantilever per 30" deep surface and one 24" cantilever per 36" deep surface.

DESCRIPTION • 1" high solid phenolic resin tops mount to ErgoStats®, Table Bases, UltraFrames and Panels.• Tops have smooth 1/8" radius corners and edges, and are predrilled for end surface supports.• Phenolic resin material is specifically manufactured for highly corrosive environments and provides exceptional chemical and wear resistance. Contact the factory for detailed chemical resistance testing data. • Load capacity 300 lbs. evenly distributed.• Finish is Black.


rectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularrectangularrectangular

1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]

24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]

24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]

29 [13.1]36 [16.3]43 [19.6]58 [26.1]72 [32.7]86 [39.2]115 [52.3]36 [16.3]45 [20.4]54 [24.5]72 [32.7]90 [40.8]108 [49]144 [65.3]43 [19.6]54 [24.5]65 [29.4]86 [39.2]108 [49]130 [58.8]173 [78.4]

TSP2424BKTSP2430BKTSP2436BKTSP2448BKTSP2460BKTSP2472BKTSP2496BKTSP3024BKTSP3030BKTSP3036BKTSP3048BKTSP3060BKTSP3072BKTSP3096BKTSP3624BKTSP3630BKTSP3636BKTSP3648BKTSP3660BKTSP3672BKTSP3696BK

TSP

D

W

SIDE

TOP

PHENOLIC SYSTEM TOPS

Rev. 3.20.12

H

4.14

WO

RK

SU

RFA

CE

S &

SU

PP

OR

TS

AN

D


DESCRIPTION • 11/4" high laminate surfaces mount to ErgoStats®, Table Bases, UltraFrames and Panels.• Surfaces have square corners with matching Edge-band.• Corner surfaces each include one corner bracket.• Surfaces are predrilled for supports and most accessories.• Load capacity 300 lbs. evenly distributed.

NOTES • Surface supports sold separately; see pages 4.26 - 4.28.• Corner surfaces ship with one corner bracket. Left and right-side supports must be ordered separately; see pages 4.26 - 4.28.• 60", 72" and 96" wide frame-mounted surfaces must be supported in the center by Surface Cantilever Supports. Specify one 18" cantilever per 24" and 30" deep surface and one 24" cantilever per 36" deep surface.

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS Product Height Width Depth WeightNumber Description in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] lb. [kg] SLS2424SLS2430SLS2436SLS2448SLS2460SLS2472SLS2496SLS3024SLS3030SLS3036SLS3048SLS3060SLS3072SLS3096SLS3624SLS3630SLS3636SLS3648SLS3660SLS3672SLS3696SCLS2448SCLS3048SCLS3648


11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]

24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]48 [1219]48 [1219]48 [1219]

24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]

22 [10]24 [11]29 [13]36 [16]45 [20]54 [24]72 [33]24 [11]30 [14]36 [16]45 [20]56 [25]67 [30]90 [41]26 [12]36 [16]43 [20]54 [24]67 [30]80 [36]108 [49]72 [33]74 [34]78 [35]



WORK SURFACES - STANDARD LAMINATE SQUARE CORNERS

SLS SCLS

SLSW

D

TOP

W

H

D

SCLS

SIDE

TOP

WW

DD

H

Rev. 10.28.11Rev. 02.17.15

HSIDE

4.15

WO

RK

SUR

FAC

ES &

SUP

PO

RT

S


TOP


WORK SURFACES - STANDARD LAMINATE FULL-ROUND EDGE

DESCRIPTION • 11/4" high laminate surfaces mount to ErgoStats®, Table Bases, UltraFrames and Panels.• Surfaces have matching vinyl Full-round front edge with Edge-band on the back and side edges.• Corner surfaces each include one corner bracket.• Surfaces are predrilled for supports and most accessories.• Load capacity 300 lbs. evenly distributed.

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS Product Height Width Depth WeightNumber Description in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] lb. [kg] SLR2424SLR2430SLR2436SLR2448SLR2460SLR2472SLR2496SLR3024SLR3030SLR3036SLR3048SLR3060SLR3072SLR3096SLR3624SLR3630SLR3636SLR3648SLR3660SLR3672SLR3696SCLR2448SCLR3048SCLR3648


11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]

24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]48 [1219]48 [1219]48 [1219]

24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]

22 [10]24 [11]29 [13]36 [16]45 [20]54 [24]72 [33]24 [11]30 [14]36 [16]45 [20]56 [25]67 [30]90 [41]26 [12]36 [16]43 [20]54 [24]67 [30]80 [36]108 [49]72 [33]74 [34]78 [35]



SLR SCLR

SLRW

D

H

TOP

W

H

D

SCLR

SIDE

TOP

D D

W W

H

Rev. 10.28.11 Rev. 02.17.15

HSIDE

4.16

WO

RK

SU

RFA

CE

S &

SU

PP

OR

TS

AN

D


WORK SURFACE PENINSULAS - STANDARD LAMINATE

DESCRIPTION • 11/4" high laminate surface assemblies mount to UltraFrames or Panels or attach to adjacent rectangular surfaces.• Peninsulas include matching Edge-band or Full-round edge. • Peninsulas each include a black 31/4" diameter leg with an adjustment range of 27" to 36" to the underside of the surfaces.• Peninsulas are predrilled for surface supports.• Load capacity 300 lbs. evenly distributed.

Notes• Work Surface Stretcher Bars or Cantilever Supports are required to mount to UltraFrames or Panels. Surface B Support Brackets are required for attachment to C Legs. Order supports separately; see pages 4.26 - 4.28.• Link Plates are required to attach peninsulas directly to adjacent surfaces without the use of other surface supports. Finish is black only. Order separately; see below.• Ultra Surface Peninsulas are not predrilled for Task Drawers.

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS Product Height Width Depth WeightNumber Description in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] lb. [kg] SPLS3048 SPLS3060SPLS3072SPLS3648SPLS3660SPLS3672SPLR3048SPLR3060SPLR3072 SPLR3648SPLR3660SPLR3672 PLEGBTLPLATE


11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]

1/6 [4]

48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]31/4 [83] 20 [508]

30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]31/4 [83] 8 [203]

55 [25]66 [30]77 [35]64 [29]77 [35]90 [41]55 [25]66 [30]77 [35]64 [29]77 [35]90 [41]10 [5]5 [2]

Rev. 01.29.09

TOP

PLEG

LPLATE

SIDE

H

D

W



Rev. 07.31.14

4.17

WO

RK

SUR

FAC

ES &

SUP

PO

RT

S


NOTES • Surface supports sold separately; see pages 4.26 - 4.28.• Corner surfaces ship with one corner bracket. Order left and right-side supports separately (pp. 4.26 - 4.28).• 60", 72" and 96" wide frame-mounted surfaces must be supported in the center by Surface Cantilever Supports. Specify one 18" cantilever per 24" and 30" deep surface and one 24" cantilever per 36" deep surfaces.• Customers are responsible for specifying ESD surface requirements; corporate ESD standards must be consulted prior to ordering.

DESCRIPTION • 11/4" high laminate surfaces mount to ErgoStats®, Table Bases, UltraFrames and Panels.• Symbiote dissipative surfaces are manufactured with Nevamar® Static dissipative Laminates (SDL). Nevamar SDL is manufactured to have a point to point and point to ground resistance of 1 x 106 to 1 x 109 ohms @ 10-60% relative humidity. Nevamar Static Dissipative Laminates conform to ESD Association Standard ESD-S4.1.• Dissipative surfaces each include a Laminate Grounding Terminal Kit• Surfaces have square corners with matching Edge-band.• Corner surfaces each include one corner bracket.• Surfaces are predrilled for supports and most accessories.• Load capacity 300 lbs. evenly distributed.

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS Product Height Width Depth WeightNumber Description in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] lb. [kg] SDS2424SDS2430SDS2436SDS2448SDS2460SDS2472SDS2496 SDS3024SDS3030SDS3036SDS3048 SDS3060SDS3072SDS3096SDS3624SDS3630SDS3636SDS3648SDS3660SDS3672SDS3696SCDS2448SCDS3048 SCDS3648


11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]

24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]48 [1219]48 [1219]48 [1219]

24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]

22 [10]24 [11]29 [13]36 [16]45 [20]54 [24]72 [33]24 [11]30 [14]36 [16]45 [20]56 [25]67 [30]90 [41]26 [12]36 [16]43 [20]54 [24]67 [30]80 [36]108 [49]72 [33]74 [34]78 [35]

WORK SURFACES - DISSIPATIVE LAMINATE SQUARE CORNERS



SDS SCDS

SDSW

D

H

TOP

SCDS

SIDE

TOP

W W

D D

H

Rev. 10.28.11 Rev. 02.17.15

HSIDE

4.18

WO

RK

SU

RFA

CE

S &

SU

PP

OR

TS

AN

D


NOTES • Surface supports sold separately; see pages 4.26 - 4.28.• Corner surfaces ship with one corner bracket. Left and right-side supports must be ordered separately; see pages 4.26 - 4.28.• 60", 72" and 96" wide frame-mounted surfaces must be supported in the center by Surface Cantilever Supports. Specify one 18" cantilever per 24" and 30" deep surface and one 24" cantilever per 36" deep surface.• Customers are responsible for specifying ESD surface requirements; corporate ESD standards must be consulted prior to ordering.

WORK SURFACES - DISSIPATIVE LAMINATE FULL-ROUND EDGE

DESCRIPTION • 11/4" high laminate surfaces mount to ErgoStats®, Table Bases, UltraFrames and Panels.• Symbiote dissipative surfaces are manufactured with Nevamar® Static Dissipative Laminates (SDL). Nevamar SDL is manufactured to have a point to point and point to ground resistance of 1 x 106 to 1 x 109 ohms @ 10-60% relative humidity. Nevamar Static Dissipative Laminates conform to ESD Association Standard ESD-S4.1.• Dissipative surfaces each include a Laminate Grounding Terminal Kit.• Surfaces have matching vinyl Full-round front edges with Edge-band on the back and side edges.• Corner surfaces each include one corner bracket.• Surfaces are predrilled for supports and most accessories.• Load capacity 300 lbs. evenly distributed.

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS Product Height Width Depth WeightNumber Description in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] lb. [kg] SDR2424SDR2430SDR2436SDR2448SDR2460SDR2472SDR2496 SDR3024SDR3030SDR3036SDR3048 SDR3060SDR3072SDR3096SDR3624SDR3630SDR3636SDR3648SDR3660SDR3672SDR3696SCDR2448SCDR3048 SCDR3648


11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]

24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]48 [1219]48 [1219]48 [1219]

24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]

22 [10]24 [11]29 [13]36 [16]45 [20]54 [24]72 [33]24 [11]30 [14]36 [16]45 [20]56 [25]67 [30]90 [41]26 [12]36 [16]43 [20]54 [24]67 [30]80 [36]108 [49]72 [33]74 [34]78 [35]



SDR SCDR

SDRW

D

H

TOP

SCDR

SIDE

TOP

WW

D D

H

Rev. 10.28.11

Rev. 07.31.14

Rev. 02.17.15

HSIDE

4.19

WO

RK

SUR

FAC

ES &

SUP

PO

RT

S


WORK SURFACE PENINSULAS - DISSIPATIVE LAMINATE

DESCRIPTION • 11/4" high laminate surface assemblies mount to UltraFrames or Panels or attach to adjacent rectangular surfaces.• Symbiote dissipative surfaces are manufactured with Nevamar® Static Dissipative Laminates (SDL). Nevamar SDL is manufactured to have a point to point and point to ground resistance of 1 x 106 to 1 x 109 ohms @ 10-60% relative humidity. Nevamar Static Dissipative Laminates conform to ESD Association Standard ESD-S4.1.• Dissipative peninsulas each include a Laminate Grounding Terminal Kit.• Peninsulas include matching Edge-band or Full-round edge. • Peninsulas each include a black 31/4" diameter leg with an adjustment range from 27" to 36" to the underside of the surfaces.• Peninsulas are predrilled for surface supports.• Load capacity 300 lbs. evenly distributed.


Rev. 01.29.09

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS Product Height Width Depth WeightNumber Description in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] lb. [kg] SPDS3048SPDS3060SPDS3072SPDS3648SPDS3660SPDS3672SPDR3048SPDR3060SPDR3072SPDR3648SPDR3660SPDR3672 PLEGBTLPLATE


11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]

1/6 [4]

48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]31/4 [83] 20 [508]

30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]31/4 [83] 8 [203]

55 [25]66 [30]77 [35]64 [29]77 [35]90 [41]55 [25]66 [30]77 [35]64 [29]77 [35]90 [41]10 [5]5 [2]

TOP

PLEG

LPLATE

SIDE

H

D

W



Rev. 07.31.14

Rev. 07.31.14

4.20

WO

RK

SU

RFA

CE

S &

SU

PP

OR

TS

AN

D


WORK SURFACES - CHEMSURF LAMINATE SQUARE CORNERS

DESCRIPTION • 11/4" high laminate surfaces mount to ErgoStats®, Table Bases, UltraFrames and Panels.• Chemsurf laminate is a Wilsonart product specifically designed for highly corrosive environments. Chemsurf provides exceptional chemical and wear resistance. Reference Wilsonart's website.• Surfaces have square corners with matching Edge-band.• Corner surfaces each include one corner bracket.• Surfaces are predrilled for supports and most accessories.• Load capacity 300 lbs. evenly distributed.


PRODUCT DIMENSIONS Product Height Width Depth WeightNumber Description in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] lb. [kg] SCS2424SCS2430SCS2436SCS2448SCS2460SCS2472SCS2496 SCS3024SCS3030SCS3036SCS3048 SCS3060SCS3072SCS3096SCS3624SCS3630SCS3636SCS3648SCS3660SCS3672SCS3696SCCS2448SCCS3048 SCCS3648


11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]

24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]48 [1219]48 [1219]48 [1219]

24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]

22 [10]24 [11]29 [13]36 [16]45 [20]54 [24]72 [33]24 [11]30 [14]36 [16]45 [20]56 [25]67 [30]90 [41]26 [12]36 [16]43 [20]54 [24]67 [30]80 [36]108 [49]72 [33]74 [34]78 [35]


SCS SCCS

SCSW

D

H

TOP

SCCS

SIDE

TOP

WW

D D

H

Rev. 10.28.11Rev. 02.17.15

HSIDE


4.21

WO

RK

SUR

FAC

ES &

SUP

PO

RT

S


TOP

WORK SURFACES - CHEMSURF LAMINATE FULL-ROUND EDGE

DESCRIPTION • 11/4" high laminate surfaces mount to ErgoStats®, Table Bases, UltraFrames and Panels.• Chemsurf laminate is a Wilsonart product specifically designed for highly corrosive environments. Chemsurf provides exceptional chemical and wear resistance. Reference Wilsonart's website. • Surfaces have matching vinyl Full-round front edges with Edge-band on the back and side edges.• Corner surfaces each include one corner bracket.• Surfaces are predrilled for supports and most accessories.• Load capacity 300 lbs. evenly distributed.


SCR


PRODUCT DIMENSIONS Product Height Width Depth WeightNumber Description in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] lb. [kg] SCR2424SCR2430SCR2436SCR2448SCR2460SCR2472SCR2496 SCR3024SCR3030SCR3036SCR3048 SCR3060SCR3072SCR3096SCR3624SCR3630SCR3636SCR3648SCR3660SCR3672SCR3696SCCR2448SCCR3048 SCCR3648


11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]

24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]48 [1219]48 [1219]48 [1219]

24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]

22 [10]24 [11]29 [13]36 [16]45 [20]54 [24]72 [33]24 [11]30 [14]36 [16]45 [20]56 [25]67 [30]90 [41]26 [12]36 [16]43 [20]54 [24]67 [30]80 [36]108 [49]72 [33]74 [34]78 [35]

SDRSCR

SCCR

Rev. 10.28.11

W

D

W

D

H

SCR SCCR

Rev. 02.17.15

HSIDE


4.22

WO

RK

SU

RFA

CE

S &

SU

PP

OR

TS

AN

D


WORK SURFACE PENINSULAS - CHEMSURF LAMINATE

DESCRIPTION • 11/4" high laminate surface assemblies mount to UltraFrames or Panels or attach to adjacent rectangular surfaces.• Chemsurf laminate is a Wilsonart product specifically designed for highly corrosive environments. Chemsurf provides exceptional chemical and wear resistance. Reference Wilsonart's website.• Peninsulas include matching Edge-band or Full-round edge. • Peninsulas each include a black 31/4" diameter leg with an adjustment range of 27" to 36" to the underside of the surfaces.• Peninsulas are predrilled for surface supports.• Load capacity 300 lbs. evenly distributed.




SPCS3048SPCS3060SPCS3072SPCS3648SPCS3660SPCS3672SPCR3048SPCR3060SPCR3072SPCR3648SPCR3660SPCR3672 PLEGBTLPLATE


11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]

1/6 [4]

48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]31/4 [83] 20 [508]

30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]31/4 [83] 8 [203]

55 [25]66 [30]77 [35]64 [29]77 [35]90 [41]55 [25]66 [30]77 [35]64 [29]77 [35]90 [41]10 [5]5 [2]

Rev. 01.29.09

TOPPLEG

LPLATE

SIDE

H

D

W

Rev. 07.31.14

Rev. 07.31.14


4.23

WO

RK

SUR

FAC

ES &

SUP

PO

RT

S


NOTES • WorkTops mount to WorkTables and 4-Legged Tables.• 30" deep WorkTops will not accommodate any surface mounted accessories deeper than 12" and 36" deep WorkTops will not accommodate any accessories deeper than 15".

WORKTOPS - STANDARD LAMINATE

DESCRIPTION • 11/4" high laminate tops mount to WorkTable Bases or 4-Legged Tables, constructing two-sided height adjustable tables.• Tops have matching vinyl T-edge or Full-round edge. T-edged WorkTops have 1" radius corners. Full-round edged tops have Full-round edging on the front and back sides with Edge-band on the side edges.• Load capacity 500 lbs. evenly distributed.

TO ORDER, SPECIFY:1) Product Number2) Laminate Standard Standard Laminates: BK Black GF Grey Fleck GL Grey Light NW Neutral White SA Sand SF Sand Fleck WF White Fleck

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS Product Height Width Depth WeightNumber Description in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] lb. [kg] WLT3048WLT3060WLT3072WLT3096WLT3648WLT3660WLT3672WLT3696WLR3048WLR3060WLR3072WLR3096WLR3648WLR3660WLR3672WLR3696

T-edgeT-edgeT-edgeT-edgeT-edgeT-edgeT-edgeT-edgefull-roundfull-roundfull-roundfull-round full-roundfull-roundfull-roundfull-round

11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]

48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]

30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]

45 [20]56 [25]67 [30]90 [41]54 [24]67 [30]80 [36]108 [49]45 [20]56 [25]67 [30]90 [41]54 [24]67 [30]80 [36]108 [49]

Rev. 01.29.09

WLT WLR

Rev. 07.31.14

Rev. 07.31.14

TOP

SIDE

W

D

H

4.24

WO

RK

SU

RFA

CE

S &

SU

PP

OR

TS

AN

D


WORKTOPS - DISSIPATIVE LAMINATE

DESCRIPTION • 11/4" high laminate tops mount to WorkTable Bases or 4-Legged Tables, constructing two-sided height adjustable tables.• Symbiote dissipative surfaces are manufactured with Nevamar® Static Dissipative Laminates (SDL). Nevamar SDL is manufactured to have a point to point and point to ground resistance of 1 x 106 to 1 x 109 ohms @ 10-60% relative humidity. Nevamar Static Dissipative Laminates conform to ESD Association Standard ESD-S4.1.• Dissipative tops each include a Laminate Grounding Terminal Kit.• Tops include matching vinyl T-edge or Full-round edge. T-Edged WorkTops have 1" radius corners. Full-round edged tops have Full-round edging on the front and back sides with Edge-band on the side edges.• Load capacity 500 lbs. evenly distributed.

Rev. 01.29.09

NOTES • WorkTops mount to WorkTables and 4-Legged Tables.• 30" deep WorkTops will not accommodate any surface mounted accessories deeper than 12" and 36" deep WorkTops will not accommodate any accessories deeper than 15".• Customers are responsible for specifying ESD surface requirements; corporate ESD standards must be consulted prior to ordering.

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS Product Height Width Depth WeightNumber Description in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] lb. [kg] WDT3048WDT3060WDT3072WDT3096WDT3648WDT3660WDT3672WDT3696WDR3048WDR3060WDR3072WDR3096WDR3648WDR3660WDR3672WDR3696

T-edgeT-edgeT-edgeT-edgeT-edgeT-edgeT-edgeT-edgefull-roundfull-roundfull-roundfull-round full-roundfull-roundfull-roundfull-round

11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]

48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]

30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]

45 [20]56 [25]67 [30]90 [41]54 [24]67 [30]80 [36]108 [49]45 [20]56 [25]67 [30]90 [41]54 [24]67 [30]80 [36]108 [49]

WDT WDR



Rev. 07.31.14

Rev. 07.31.14

TOP

SIDE

W

D

H

4.25

WO

RK

SUR

FAC

ES &

SUP

PO

RT

S


WORKTOPS - CHEMSURF LAMINATE

DESCRIPTION • 11/4" high laminate tops mount to WorkTable Bases or 4-Legged Tables, constructing two-sided height adjustable tables.• Chemsurf laminate is a Wilsonart product specifically designed for highly corrosive environments. Chemsurf provides exceptional chemical and wear resistance. Reference Wilsonart's website.• The tops include matching vinyl T-Edge or Full-round edge. T-Edged WorkTops have 1" radius corners. Full-round edged tops have Full- round edging on the front and back sides with Edge-band on the side edges.• Load capacity 500 lbs. evenly distributed.


11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]

48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]

30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]

WCT3048WCT3060WCT3072WCT3096WCT3648WCT3660WCT3672WCT3696WCR3048WCR3060WCR3072WCR3096WCR3648WCR3660WCR3672WCR3696

T-edgeT-edgeT-edgeT-edgeT-edgeT-edgeT-edgeT-edgefull-roundfull-roundfull-roundfull-roundfull-roundfull-roundfull-roundfull-round

45 [20]56 [25]67 [30]90 [41]54 [24]67 [30]80 [36]108 [49]45 [20]56 [25]67 [30]90 [41]54 [24]67 [30]80 [36]108 [49]

NOTES • WorkTops mount to WorkTables and 4-Legged Tables.• 30" deep WorkTops will not accommodate any surface mounted accessories deeper than 12" and 36" deep WorkTops will not accommodate any accessories deeper than 15".


Rev. 01.29.09

WCT WCR

Rev. 07.31.14

Rev. 07.31.14

TOP

SIDE

W

D

H


4.26

WO

RK

SU

RFA

CE

S &

SU

PP

OR

TS

AN

D


NOTES • WorkTops mount to WorkTables and 4-Legged Tables.• 30" deep WorkTops will not accommodate any surface mounted accessories deeper than 12" and 36" deep WorkTops will not accommodate any accessories

Rev. 01.29.09


WORKTOPS - HARDWOOD

DESCRIPTION • 11/4" high hardwood tops mount to WorkTable Bases or 4-Legged Tables, constructing two-sided height adjustable tables.• Tops consist of kiln-dried hardwood strips face glued, sanded smooth and finished with a two coat catalyzed varnish.• Tops have a full radius front and back edge with square-edged sides.• Load capacity 500 lbs. evenly distributed.


11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32] 11/4 [32]

48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]

30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]

WMR3048CCWMR3060CCWMR3072CCWMR3096CCWMR3648CCWMR3660CCWMR3672CCWMR3696CC

50 [23]63 [29]75 [34]100 [45]60 [27]75 [34]90 [41]120 [54]

Rev. 04.16.15

TOP

W

D

SIDEH

4.27

WO

RK

SUR

FAC

ES &

SUP

PO

RT

S


SURFACE B SUPPORT BRACKETS

NOTES • 72" and 96" wide frame-mounted surfaces must be supported in the center by Surface Cantilever Supports. Specify one 18" cantilever per 24" and 30" deep surface and one 24" cantilever per 36" deep surface.

DESCRIPTION • Brackets provide manual height adjustable support for Ultra or Work Surfaces mounted to C Leg Supports.• Brackets allow for surface heights to be adjusted in 1" increments. Height to the top of the support bracket ranges from 257/8" to 357/8"

when used with CLM Legs and from 307/8" to 407/8" when used with CLT Legs.• Extended brackets are for use with 36" deep surfaces, while the 185/8" deep brackets are for use with 24" and 30" deep surfaces.


121/4 [310] 121/4 [310] 121/4 [310] 121/4 [310]

leftrightleft, extendedright, extended

21/4 [57]21/4 [57]21/4 [57]21/4 [57]

185/8 [473] 185/8 [473] 245/8 [626] 245/8 [626]

WBL10WBR10WBEL10WBER10

12 [5]12 [5]16 [7]16 [7]

FRONT SIDESIDE

WB WBE

DDW



H H

Rev. 07.31.14

4.28

WO

RK

SU

RFA

CE

S &

SU

PP

OR

TS

AN

D


SURFACE CANTILEVER SUPPORTS

DESCRIPTION • Cantilevers provide manual height adjustable support for 24" and 30" deep Ultra or Work Surfaces mounted to UltraFrames or Panels.• Cantilevers each have a cut-out at the rear allowing for the pass through of cords and cables.


81/2 [14] 81/2 [14] 101/2 [337] 101/2 [337]

leftrightleftright

11/4 [57]11/4 [57]11/4 [57]11/4 [57]

18 [457]18 [457]23 [584] 23 [584]

WSL18WSR18WSL24WSR24

4 [2]4 [2]5 [2]5 [2]

NOTES • Use 24" supports with 24" and 30" deep surfaces; 36" deep surfaces require Extended Surface B Support Brackets; see page 4.26.• 72" and 96" wide frame-mounted surfaces must be supported in the center by Surface Cantilever Supports. Specify one 18" cantilever per 24" and 30" deep surface and one 24" cantilever per 36" deep surface.

W D

WSL18

WSL

Side

Top

H

Rev. 02.26.10

WSL

W D

WSL18

WSL

Side

Top

H

TOP

SIDE

H

DW



Rev. 07.31.14

4.29

WO

RK

SUR

FAC

ES &

SUP

PO

RT

S


SIDE FRONT

Rev. 09.23.10

FRAME-MOUNT SURFACE SUPPORTS

DESCRIPTION • Supports mount to return UltraFrames and Panels providing rigid support for the left and right edges of Ultra or Work Surfaces.• Brackets are vertically adjustable in 1" increments.• Dissipative supports each include an ESD Cable Kit Assembly for grounding.• Frame-Mount Surface Supports are sold individually and are non-handed for surface depths of 30" and greater.• Brackets have two hanger clip mounting positions to accommodate both standard B/C and Lab Height Modules• Finish must be specified.


53/4 [121] 53/4 [121]53/4 [121]53/4 [121]

non-handednon-handedleftright

2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]

30 [762]36 [914]24 [610]24 [610]

WSB30WSB36WSBL24WSBR24

10 [5]12 [5]8 [4]8 [4]



H

WW

Rev. 07.31.14

4.30

WO

RK

SU

RFA

CE

S &

SU

PP

OR

TS

AN

D


WRB48BKWRB60BKWRB72BK

reinforcement bar, pairreinforcement bar, pairreinforcement bar, pair

15 [7] 18 [8] 21 [9]

2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]

431/2 -491/2 [1105-1257]551/2 -611/2 [1410-1562]671/2 -731/2 [1715-1867]

2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]


DESCRIPTION • Surface Reinforcement Bars provide horizontal support under work surfaces for increased rigidity. • Bars are sold in pairs and mount to Surface B Supports, Lab Height B Supports or Frame-Mount Surface Supports. • Bars adjust over a 6" range to accommodate inboard and outboard C Leg clearance. • Finish is Black.

NOTES: • Reinforcement Bars cannot be used with Cantilever Brackets.


W

H

D

SURFACE REINFORCEMENT BARS

FRONT

TOP

Rev. 09.23.10Rev. 07.31.14

4.31

WO

RK

SUR

FAC

ES &

SUP

PO

RT

S



SURFACE ACCESSORY BRACKETS


4 [102]81/4 [217]

shorttall

3/4 [20]2 [51]

11/2 [38]11/2 [38]

SRCSBKSRCTBK

1 [1/4 ]3 [1]

DESCRIPTION • Brackets provide mounting locations for accessories above or below the surface. • Short Surface Accessory Brackets are non-handed and mount Electric Plug Strips approximately 1” above the surface, or can be flipped over to mount plug strips 2½” below the surface.• Tall Surface Accessory Brackets are handed and can be used to mount Dispensing Rails, Bin Rails, Slatwall Rails, Electric Plug Strips or Air Strips above the surface. • The tall brackets can also be flipped over and mounted to the underside of the surface to support Frame-mount Cable Trays or Electric Plug Strips.• Brackets are sold in pairs and mount to surfaces with wood screws.• Finish is Black.

NOTES • Two pairs of Tall Surface Accessory Brackets are shown in the image above.• Work Surfaces, WorkTops and Ultra Surfaces are not pre-drilled for Surface Accessory Brackets.

SRCSBK SRCTBK

Rev. 01.25.11

SIDE

D

H

W

FRONT

SIDEFRONT

W

H

D

Rev. 10.12.11

4.32

WO

RK

SU

RFA

CE

S &

SU

PP

OR

TS

AN

D


NOTES • Can be used together with Universal Cable Trays which are sold separately; see page 9.5.

Rev. 03.20.12

SURFACE BACK STOPS

DESCRIPTION • Surface Back Stops prevent equipment or small parts from falling off the back edge of surfaces.• Stops provide a 13/4" raised edge above the back of 11/4" high surfaces.


3 [76]3 [76]3 [76]3 [76]3 [76]3 [76]

211/2 [546]271/2 [699]331/2 [851] 451/2 [1543] 571/2 [1461] 691/2 [1765]

3 [76] 3 [76]3 [76]3 [76]3 [76]3 [76]

BS24BS30BS36BS48BS60BS72

3 [1]31/2 [11/2]5 [2]6 [3]7 [3]8 [4]

BS



W

H

D

FRONT SIDE

Rev. 10.12.11

4.33

WO

RK

SUR

FAC

ES &

SUP

PO

RT

S


NOTES • Mounting hardware is not included. Adhesive or thru-bolting to the horizontal surface is recommended.

DESCRIPTION • 4" high solid phenolic resin backsplashes have smooth 1/8" radius corners and edges.• Phenolic resin material is specifically manufactured for highly corrosive environments and provides exceptional chemical and wear resistance. Contact the factory for detailed chemical resistance testing data. • Finish is Black.


4 [102]4 [102]4 [102]4 [102]4 [102]4 [102]4 [102]

24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]

1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]

BSP424BKBSP430BKBSP436BKBSP448BKBSP460BKBSP472BKBSP496BK

5 [2.2]6 [2.7]7 [3.3]10 [4.4]12 [5.4]14 [6.5] 19 [8.7]

BSP


H

D

FRONT SIDE

PHENOLIC BACKSPLASHES

W

Rev. 03.20.12

4.34

WO

RK

SU

RFA

CE

S &

SU

PP

OR

TS

AN

D


SURFACE GAP FILLERS AND LEVELING PLATES

DESCRIPTION Surface Gap Fillers• Surface Gap Fillers cover the gaps between back-to-back surfaces mounted on UltraFrames.• Painted steel fillers have a spring form fit and work with all surface types.• Finish must be specified.

Surface Leveling Plates• 10 gauge steel plates fasten to the underside of adjacent surfaces providing additional support and alignment for the front edges.• Finish is Black.

Grommets• Plastic wiring grommet provides power and data cable management through the work surface.• Grommet has removable cap with adjustable opening for desired cable capacity.• Field installed using a 3-1/8" (79mm) hole saw.• Finish is Black.


1 [25]1 [25] 1 [25]1 [25]1/8 [3]1 [25]

26 [660]32 [813]44 [1118]55 [1397]3 [76]3 [76]

51/4 [133]51/4 [133]51/4 [133]51/4 [133]3/4 [19] 3 [76]

GFO30GFO36GFO48GFO60SLPBKGR3PBK

2 [1]2 [1]3 [1]4 [2]1/4 [.2]1 [.5]

gap fillergap fillergap fillergap fillerleveling plategrommet

NOTES • Surface Leveling Plates are not to be used to attach Surface Peninsulas to adjacent surfaces.

Rev. 09.23.10

GFO

SLP

TOP SIDE

GFO



W

HD

W

D

H

SIDE

TOP

Rev. 10.28.11

GR3P

GR3P

4.35

WO

RK

SUR

FAC

ES &

SUP

PO

RT

S


DESCRIPTION • 1" high solid phenolic resin gap fillers cover the gaps between back-to-back surfaces mounted on UltraFrames.• Fillers have smooth 1/8" radius corners and edges.• Phenolic resin material is specifically manufactured for highly corrosive environments and provides exceptional chemical and wear resistance. Contact the factory for detailed chemical resistance testing data.• Finish is Black.


1 [25]1 [25] 1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]

18 [457]24 [610]30 [762]42 [1067]54 [1372]

3.5 [89]3.5 [89]3.5 [89]3.5 [89]3.5 [89]

GFP24BKGFP30BKGFP36BKGFP48BKGFP60BK

3 [1.4]4 [1.9]5 [2.4]7 [3.3]9 [4.3]


W

D

H

TOP

FRONTGFP

Rev. 03.20.12

PHENOLIC GAP FILLERS

4.36

WO

RK

SU

RFA

CE

S &

SU

PP

OR

TS

AN

D


PHENOLIC GAP FILLERS

Symbiote offers several specialty surfaces to fit your design requirements. These surfaces are custom made to your order and priced per project. Consult factory for specifications and ordering information.

DescriptionBall Transfer Surfaces• Provide easy mobility of heavy or awkward objects on work surfaces.• Surfaces utilize 3/4" diameter transfer balls that are flush mounted to standard or dissipative laminate surfaces.• Available with fixed transfer balls or air activated retractable pneumatic transfer balls.• Hand or foot controls available.

Resin Surfaces• Provide durable work surfaces for areas where chemical, stain and corrosion resistance are required.• Surfaces are nonporous, nonconductive and are high impact and shock resistant.• Surfaces consist of solid phenolic resin and are finished on both sides.

Conveyors• Conveyors are available for increased productivity of high volume processes or for easy mobility of heavy or awkward objects within workstations.• Conveyors can be integrated into Symbiote’s furniture or specified as stand alone units.• Gravity and power roller, skate wheel and belt-driven conveyors available.• Options such as side rails, right angle or curved transfers and entry gates are also available.

CUSTOM WORK SURFACES

Rev. 09.23.09

BALL TRANSFER

RESIN

ROLLER CONVEYOR

Rev. 10.14.09

4.37

WO

RK

SUR

FAC

ES &

SUP

PO

RT

S


AUXILIARY WORK SURFACE

DESCRIPTION • Steel platform and housing provide additional work surface space and mount to surfaces or Storage Accessory Mounting Bracket.• Auxiliary Work Surface features 18" full-extension ball-bearing slides with in and out detent.• Load capacity 35 pounds evenly distributed.

H

FRONT

WTOP

D


25/8 [67] 15 [381] 18 [457]AWS1518 151/2 [7 ]

Rev. 05.13.15

TO ORDER, SPECIFY:1) Product Number2) Finish Standard Standard Finishes: BK Black BT Black Texture* GL Grey Light Smooth GT Grey Light Texture* NW Neutral White ST Sand Texture*




2015

GR

OU

ND

ING

HA

RD

WA

RE

5.1GROUNDING HARDWAREGROUNDING HARDWAREwww.symbiote.com 800.283.2434 www.symbiote.com 800.283.24345

GROUNDING HARDWARE

Grounding Hardware 5.2

SECTION 5

5.2

GR

OU

ND

ING

HA

RD

WA

RE

GROUNDING HARDWAREGROUNDING HARDWAREwww.symbiote.com 800.283.2434 www.symbiote.com 800.283.2434

GROUNDING HARDWARE

Cable Kit Assemblies• Cable Kit Assemblies provide for frame-to-frame grounding.• Kits also provide for grounding of dissipative workstation components

to the grounding captivators in frames, Plug Strips and Electrical Distributors.

• Assemblies consist of 48" fully extended coil cords with multi-stud ring terminals.

Common Point Grounds• Common Point Grounds provide multiple grounding points for

dissipative components in ESD workstations.• Nickel plated steel plates attach to grounding points on UltraFrames,

ErgoStat® Riser Frames and UltraFrame Spines.• The 1/4" thick plates measure 5" by 13/4".

Ground Balls• Ground Balls provide grounding for dissipative UltraFrames with

Casters to ESD floors.• Assemblies consist of 1" diameter 10/10 steel back copper, chrome

plated balls riveted to 6" nylon coated stainless steel cables with

1/4" eyelets.• Specify one Ground Ball per mobile workstation.

Ground Chains• Ground Chains provide grounding for dissipative UltraFrames with

Casters to ESD floors.• Assemblies consist of two 6" tangle free chains composed of 1/4"

diameter stainless steel balls with 1/4" eyelets.• Specify one pair of Ground Chains per mobile workstation.• All dissipative ErgoStats, Table Bases, WorkTables, Mobile Frames

and Tote Frames come equipped with Ground Chains upon ordering.

DESCRIPTION

CKA&CPG(cat)

CKA

CPG

Rev. 05.08.12

CKA

CPG

GCH6


cable kit assemblycommon point groundground ballground chain - pair

1/4 [1]1/4 [1]1/4 [1]1/4 [1]

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS Product WeightNumber Description lb. [kg]CKACPGGBAL6GCH6

GBAL6(cat)

GBAL6

GCH6(cat)

GCH6

GBAL6

GR

OU

ND

ING

HA

RD

WA

RE

5.3GROUNDING HARDWAREGROUNDING HARDWAREwww.symbiote.com 800.283.2434 www.symbiote.com 800.283.2434

GROUNDING HARDWARE

Wrist Strap Grounding Kits• Kits provide grounding for two wrist straps at one common point to

ground.• Attach to the underside of dissipative surface.• Grounding block has two 4mm banana plug receptacles, and 48" fully

extended coil cords with ring terminals.• Includes two 10mm "parking studs" to prevent damage to wrist strap

cord when not in use. • Surfaces are not predrilled for Wrist Strap Grounding blocks.• Wrist straps are not provided by Symbiote.• Front face of WGK measures 21/2" by 2".

Electrical Distributor Grounding Kit• Electrical Distributor Grounding Kit provides a grounding point on the

bottom of an Electrical Distributor when used in conjunction with an Electrical Distributor Jumper Cable and Entry Cable.

• Assembly includes a conduit clamp, 1/4-20 threaded insert, and required mounting hardware.

DESCRIPTION

WGK

EDGK

wrist strap grounding kitelectrical distributor grounding kit

1/4 [1]1/4 [1]

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS Product WeightNumber Description lb. [kg]WGKEDGK


NOTES • Verify ESD ground path with an

electrical tester before connecting components to the ground point.

Rev. 05.08.12



2015

6.1

SHELV

ING

SHELVINGSHELVINGwww.symbiote.com 800.283.2434 www.symbiote.com 800.283.24346

SHELVING

Multi-function Shelves

Center Shelves - Adjustable Angle

Corner Shelves - Laminate with Brackets

Storage Shelves - High and Low

HD Shelving

Roll-out Shelves

Shelf Dividers

6.26.36.46.56.66.76.8

SECTION 6

6.2

SHEL

VIN

G


MULTI-FUNCTION SHELVES

DESCRIPTION • Shelves provide general storage in workstations.• Assemblies each include two steel support brackets and one shelf with a 1/2" raised edge that can be positioned in the front or back. No hardware or tools are needed for assembly.• Shelves mount flat or in a sloped position.• Dissipative shelves each include an ESD Cable Kit Assembly for grounding.• Load capacity 200 lbs. evenly distributed.



NOTES • Shelf Depth Shelf Slope 11” 24° 15" 17° 18" 21° 24" 15°• When mounted on Fabric or Laminate Panels in the flat position, there is a 3/8" gap between the back of each shelf and the Panel limiting the amount of space for cord drops. • Greenlee Manual Round Knockout Punches can be purchased for field installation of shelf grommets. Contact them at www.greenlee.textron.com for a distributor near you.

W

Top Side

H

MFS1524(cat)

D

W

Top Side

H

MFS1524(cat)

D

W

Top Side

H

MFS1524(cat)

D

Rev. 10.18.12

MFS (flat) MFS (sloped)

TOP SIDE

W

D H

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS Product Height Width Depth WeightNumber in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] lb. [kg] MFS1124MFS1130MFS1136 MFS1148 MFS1160MFS1172MFS1524MFS1530MFS1536 MFS1548 MFS1560MFS1572MFS1824MFS1830MFS1836 MFS1848 MFS1860MFS1872MFS2424MFS2430MFS2436 MFS2448 MFS2460

51/2 [140] 51/2 [140]51/2 [140]51/2 [140]51/2 [140]51/2 [140]51/2 [140]51/2 [140]51/2 [140]51/2 [140]51/2 [140]51/2 [140]71/2 [191]71/2 [191]71/2 [191]71/2 [191]71/2 [191]71/2 [191]71/2 [191]71/2 [191]71/2 [191]71/2 [191]71/2 [191]

24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]

111/2 [292] 111/2 [292] 111/2 [292] 111/2 [292] 111/2 [292] 111/2 [292] 15 [381] 15 [381] 15 [381] 15 [381] 15 [381] 15 [381] 181/2 [470] 181/2 [470]181/2 [470]181/2 [470] 181/2 [470]181/2 [470]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]

15 [7]17 [8]19 [9]21 [10]25 [11]30 [14]17 [8]20 [9]23 [10]27 [12]32 [15]37 [17]18 [8]22 [10]24 [11]28 [13]35 [16]41 [29]20 [19]24 [11]28 [13]36 [16]46 [20]

6.3

SHELV

ING


CENTER SHELVES - AD JUSTABLE ANGLE

DESCRIPTION • Shelves provide general storage in workstations.• Shelves mount within the openings of Ultra Frames and can be center mounted or offset 4" to the front or back of the frames.• Assemblies each include two steel support brackets and one shelf with a 1/2" raised edge that can be positioned in the front or back. Positioning of the brackets provides raised edges on the left and right sides when mounted.• Shelves mount flat or in one of two sloping positions, 8° or 16°. Slopes are set with threaded fasteners.• Dissipative shelves each include an ESD Cable Kit Assembly for grounding.• Load capacity 200 lbs. evenly distributed.

CSA24CSA30CSA36CSA48CSA60

19 [9]23 [10]25 [11]30 [14]37 [17]

43/4 [121]43/4 [121]43/4 [121]43/4 [121]43/4 [121]

18 [457]24 [610]30 [762]42 [1067]54 [1372]

24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]




NOTES • Center Shelves cannot be mounted on ErgoStat™ Riser Spines.

Rev. 03.01.10

W

Top Side

CSA(cat)

HD

CSA

W

Top Side

CSA(cat)

HD

TOP SIDE

W

DH

6.4

SHEL

VIN

G


CORNER SHELVES - LAMINATE WITH BRACKETS

DESCRIPTION • Shelves provide general storage in corner workstation configurations.• The 1" high double-sided laminate shelves include matching vinyl Edge- band.• Assemblies each include three steel support brackets which are notched to allow for the routing of cables.• Symbiote dissipative surfaces are manufactured with Nevamar® Static Dissipative Laminates (SDL). Nevamar SDL is manufactured to have a point to point and point to ground resistance of 1 x 106 to 1 x 109 ohms @ 10-60% relative humidity. Nevamar® Static Dissipative Laminates conform to ESD Association Standard ESD-S4.1.• Dissipative shelves are manufactured using dissipative laminate on the top side with matching non-dissipative laminate on the underside and each include a Laminate Grounding Terminal Kit.• Load capacity 200 lbs. evenly distributed.NOTES • To order, specify laminate finish first, support finish second. For example, CSL1548GLGT specifies Grey Light laminate shelf with Grey Light Texture supports.• Corner Shelves are predrilled for attachment of Universal Cable Trays; see page 9.5.• 36" and 48" wide shelves are predrilled for Shelf Mount Light Brackets for 32" wide High Performance Task Lights; see page 8.12.• Other dissipative laminates available upon request; consult factory for ordering information.• Customers are responsible for specifying ESD surface requirements; corporate ESD standards must be consulted prior to ordering.

TO ORDER, SPECIFY:1) Product Number2) Laminate Standard or Dissipative Standard Laminates: GF Grey Fleck GL Grey Light NW Neutral White SA Sand SF Sand Fleck WF White Fleck BK Black Dissipative Laminates: DG Dissipative Grey Light DNW Dissipative Neutral White DS Dissipative Sand DBK Dissipative Black

3) Support Finish Standard or Dissipative Standard Finishes: BT Black Texture* GL Grey Light Smooth GT Grey Light Texture* NW Neutral White ST Sand Texture* Dissipative Finish: DG Dissipative Grey Light Smooth * Paint upcharge applies

Rev. 10.28.11

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS Product Height Width Depth WeightNumber Description in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] lb. [kg] CSL1524CSL1530CSL1536 CSL1548 CSL1824CSL1830CSL1836 CSL1848CSD1524CSD1530CSD1536 CSD1548 CSD1824CSD1830CSD1836 CSD1848

6.5 [203]6.5 [203]6.5 [203]6.5 [203]6.5 [203]6.5 [203]6.5 [203]6.5 [203]6.5 [203]6.5 [203]6.5 [203]6.5 [203]6.5 [203]6.5 [203]6.5 [203]6.5 [203]

24 [610]30 [762]36 [914] 48 [1219] 24 [610]30 [762]36 [914] 48 [1219]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914] 48 [1219]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914] 48 [1219]

15 [381]15 [381]15 [381]15 [381]181/2 [470]181/2 [470]181/2 [470]181/2 [470]15 [381]15 [381]15 [381]15 [381]181/2 [470]181/2 [470]181/2 [470]181/2 [470]

20 [9]28 [13]41 [19]70 [32]22 [10]30 [14]43 [20]72 [33]20 [9]28 [13]41 [19]70 [32]22 [10]30 [14]43 [20]72 [33]

standardstandardstandardstandardstandardstandardstandardstandarddissipativedissipativedissipativedissipativedissipativedissipativedissipativedissipative

TOP

SIDE

W

D

H

6.5

SHELV

ING


STORAGE SHELVES - HIGH AND LOW

DESCRIPTION • Shelves provide general storage in workstations.• Assemblies each include two steel shelf ends and one bottom shelf with a 1/2" raised edge that can be positioned in the front or back.• Shelves mount flat or in one of two sloping positions, 8° or 16°. Slopes are set with threaded fasteners.• Dissipative shelves each include an ESD Cable Kit Assembly for grounding.• Load capacity 200 lbs. evenly distributed.

SL1524SL1530SL1536SL1548SL1560SH1524SH1530SH1536SH1548SH1560

lowlowlowlowlowhighhighhighhighhigh

19 [9]21 [10]22 [10]25 [11]28 [13]26 [12]28 [13]29 [13]32 [15]35 [16]

71/2 [191]71/2 [191]71/2 [191]71/2 [191]71/2 [191]151/2 [394]151/2 [394]151/2 [394]151/2 [394]151/2 [394]

24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]

15 [381]15 [381]15 [381]15 [381]15 [381]15 [381]15 [381]15 [381]15 [381]15 [381]


NOTES • When mounted on closed Fabric or Laminate Panels in the flat position, there is a 3/8" gap between the back of each shelf and the panel limiting the amount of space for cord drops.

Rev. 03.01.10

SL(cat)

SL

W D

Front Side

SH(cat)

H

SH

SH

W D

Front Side

SH(cat)

H

SH

FRONT SIDE

W D

H



6.6

SHEL

VIN

G


HIGH DENSITY SHELVES

DESCRIPTION • High density shelves mount on a frame, panel or wall strips.• Shelves are vertically adjustable in 21/2" increments and can be installed in three positions (flat, 11 and 22 degrees).• Available as a three shelf or five shelf unit.• Load capacity is 150 lbs. per unit (both three and five shelf units).• Add-on shelves and front shelf lips also available.

TO ORDER, SPECIFY:1) Product Number2) Finish Standard Finishes: BK Black GL Grey Light Smooth NW Neutral White

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS

HDB1524HDB1530HDB1536 HDB1548 HDB1560HDC1524HDC1530HDC1536 HDC1548 HDC1560HD1524HD1530HD1536 HD1548 HD1560HD1524HD1530HD1536 HD1548 HD1560

223/4 [578]223/4 [578]223/4 [578]223/4 [578]223/4 [578]373/4 [958]373/4 [958]373/4 [958]373/4 [958]373/4 [958]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]11/2 [38]11/2 [38]11/2 [38]11/2 [38]11/2 [38]

24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]221/2 [572]281/2 [724]341/2 [876]461/2 [1181]581/2 [1486]221/2 [572]281/2 [724]341/2 [876]461/2 [1181]581/2 [1486]

16 [406] 16 [406] 16 [406] 16 [406] 16 [406] 16 [406] 16 [406] 16 [406] 16 [406] 16 [406] 151/4 [387]151/4 [387]151/4 [387]151/4 [387]151/4 [387]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]

37 [17]42 [19]48 [22]59 [27]71 [32]60 [27]69 [31]79 [36]98 [44]117 [53]8 [4]10 [5]12 [6]15 [7]19 [9]11/2 [1]2 [1]21/2 [1]3 [2]4 [2]

shelf, three unitshelf, three unitshelf, three unitshelf, three unitshelf, three unitshelf, five unitshelf, five unitshelf, five unitshelf, five unitshelf, five unit add shelfadd shelfadd shelfadd shelfadd shelflipliplipliplip

NOTES • End panels are constructed of MDF board and are powder coated.• Mounting brackets and shelves are metal and color matched.

D

H

H

H

FRONT TOP SIDE SIDE

Product Height Width Depth WeightNumber Description in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] lb. [kg]

DWW

D

W

HDL36HD1548

Rev. 11.24.15

6.7

SHELV

ING


ROLL-OUT SHELVES

DESCRIPTION • Shelves provide general storage in workstations.• Shelves roll out for easy access to the backside of the shelf and lock in the closed position using the push-button release adjacent to the handle of the front of the shelf.• Assemblies each include full-extension ball-bearing slides, two steel support brackets, a stretcher and a shelf with a single handle and push- button release allowing one-handed operation of the shelf lock.• Shelves extend from the front of the 217/8" brackets when fully extended. Handle extends 11/4" from the front of the shelf. • Load capacity 150 lbs. evenly distributed.

46 [21]53 [24]

93/4 [248]93/4 [248]

221/2 [572] 281/2 [724]

241/4 [616]241/4 [616]

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS Product Height Width Depth WeightNumber Description in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] lb. [kg]RSM2424RSM2430

roll-out shelfroll-out shelf



Rev. 03.01.10

NOTES • Roll-out Shelves cannot be mounted next to C Legs that are attached to the same Ultra Frames; Connector Posts with C Legs or return frames must be used for support.• No more than one loaded Roll-out Shelf should be extended at the same time.• Extended C Legs or 30" wide return frames are recommended for use with Roll-out Shelves. Consult factory for design uses.

W

D

H

TOP SIDE

Rev. 03.01.10

6.8

SHEL

VIN

G


SHELF DIVIDERS

DESCRIPTION • Dividers vertically separate paper, folders, books and binders on shelves.• Dividers mount to Multi-function, Low Profile, General Purpose, Center and Storage Shelves in the flat position only.• Scored mounting tabs allow for easy bending to hold Shelf Dividers in place once installed on shelves.• Dividers are sold in packages of 5.

6 [3]51/2 [140] 13/4 [45] 11 [279]

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS Product Height Width Depth WeightNumber in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] lb. [kg]SDV511



Rev. 01.29.09

SDV-511(cat)

D

Side Front

H

W

NOTES • Shelf Dividers will not mount on Corner, Wire, Roll-out Shelves or Storage Cabinets.

SDV-511(cat)

D

Side Front

H

WW

D

H

FRONTSIDE

Rev. 03.01.10

7.1

ST

OR

AG

E &

DISP

LA

Y

STORAGE & DISPLAYSTORAGE & DISPLAYwww.symbiote.com 800.283.2434 www.symbiote.com 800.283.24347

STORAGE & DISPLAY

Tackboards - Single & Double-sided

Pegboards

Storage Cabinet Assemblies

Pencil Drawers & Utility Mounting Brackets

Pedestals - Hanging & Mobile

Accessory Mounting Brackets

Magnetic White Boards

7.27.37.47.57.67.77.8

SECTION 7

7.2

ST

OR

AG

E &

DIS

PL

AY

AN

D


TO ORDER, SPECIFY:1) Product Number2) Bracket Paint Finish

(Double-sided only) Standard Finishes: BK Black BT Black Texture* GL Grey Light Smooth GT Grey Light Texture* NW Neutral White ST Sand Texture* * Paint upcharge applies

3) Fabric Standard Standard Fabrics: A2035 Angora A2053 Asteroid A2047 Eucalyptus A2084 Geranium A2079 Graphite A2691 Waterfall M031 Cement M024 Subway

NOTES • Double-Sided Tackboards cannot be mounted to solid panels.• Two Single-Sided Tackboards cannot be mounted level

with each other in a corner condition. Two Double-Sided Tackboards can be mounted in a corner condition.

• Customer’s Own Material (COM) is accepted. Consult factory for ordering information.

Rev. 04.30.15

DESCRIPTION • Tackboards provide for the display of notes, prints, drawings and

other items in workstations.• Opposite sides of Single-Sided Tackboards are finished with

cardboard backers.• Double-Sided Tackboards mount within the openings of UltraFrames

and ErgoStat® Riser Frames with color matched brackets. Fabric encases the core material for a frameless appearance.

TACKBOARDS - SINGLE & DOUBLE-SIDED

TBS1524TBS1530TBS1536TBS1548TBS1560TB1524TB1530TB1536TB1548TB1560

single-sidedsingle-sidedsingle-sidedsingle-sidedsingle-sideddouble-sideddouble-sideddouble-sideddouble-sideddouble-sided

4 [2]5 [2]6 [3]7 [3]8 [4]7 [3]9 [4]11 [5]14 [6]20 [9]

151/2 [394]151/2 [394]151/2 [394]151/2 [394]151/2 [394]15 [381]15 [381]15 [381]15 [381]15 [381]

24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]181/4 [464]241/4 [616]301/4 [768]421/4 [1073]541/4 [1378]

1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]


TBS TB

FRONT

W

H

D

D

FRONT

W

H

7.3

ST

OR

AG

E &

DISP

LA

Y


W

D

Front Side

PB(cat)

H

NOTES • Pegboards are single-sided; items

cannot be hung from the opposite side.

• Pegboards cannot be mounted to solid Panels.• Two Pegboards can be mounted

back-to-back in a single frame opening. Pegboards cannot be mounted back-to-back with Double-Sided Tackboards

or Magnetic White Boards.

Rev. 03.01.10

DESCRIPTION • Pegboards provide for the display of tools and work aids in

workstations.• Pegboards are formed of steel and feature 1/8" dimpled holes. • Pegboards mount within the openings of UltraFrames and ErgoStat®

Riser Frames with four brackets.• Dissipative Pegboards each include an ESD Cable Kit Assembly for

grounding.• Load capacity 100 lbs. evenly distributed.

PEGBOARDS

PB2424PB2430PB2436PB2448PB2460

9 [4]13 [6]15 [7]20 [9]25 [10]

24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]

181/4 [464]241/4 [616]301/4 [768]421/4 [1073]541/4 [1378]

3/4 [19]3/4 [19]3/4 [19]3/4 [19]3/4 [19]


W

D

Front Side

PB(cat)

H

FRONT SIDE

D

H

W



7.4

ST

OR

AG

E &

DIS

PL

AY

AN

D


NOTES • Doors are keyed randomly unless

otherwise specified. Key numbers available UM226 – 425.

• To change locks in the field or to request a specific lock number, consult factory.

Rev. 12.04.12

DESCRIPTION • Storage Cabinets provide secure storage in workstations.• Steel assemblies each include two shelf ends, a bottom shelf, one

door unit including top and a back panel.• Doors retract above the top panel and are equipped with individual

key locks for security.• Storage cabinets meet or exceed ANSI-BIFMA standards for safety

and reliability.

STORAGE CABINET ASSEMBLIES

FRONT SIDE

SCA24SCA30SCA36SCA48SCA60

38 [17]42 [19]49 [22]58 [26]68 [31]

15 [381]15 [381]15 [381]15 [381]15 [381]

24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]

131/2 [343]131/2 [343]131/2 [343]131/2 [343]131/2 [343]



W D

H

7.5

ST

OR

AG

E &

DISP

LA

Y




NOTES • Surfaces are not predrilled for Pencil Drawers.

Rev. 07.29.14

PD

PENCIL DRAWERS

FRONT

SIDE

H

DESCRIPTION • Black plastic drawers provide storage for pencils, pens, office

accessories and other small items.• Drawers mount under Ultra, Work and Peninsula Surfaces.• Load capacity 25 lbs.

PD2015BK 5 [2]21/8 [54] 211/8 [537] 161/4 [413]


UTILITY DISPENSER MOUNTING BRACKET

DESCRIPTION • Utility Dispenser Mounting Bracket provides a secure means of

mounting a variety of dispensers or accessory items.• Dispensers or accessory items may be tek-screwed, hung from the lip

or mounted with double-sided tape (not provided).• Load capacity 20 lbs.

UDMB 2 [1]43/4 [119] 123/4 [325] 21/2 [64]


W

HD

W

D

7.6

ST

OR

AG

E &

DIS

PL

AY

AN

D

STORAGE & DISPLAYSTORAGE & DISPLAYwww.symbiote.com 800.283.2434 www.symbiote.com 800.283.2434Rev. 05.06.10

NOTES • Other drawer depths available; consult factory.• Master keys and core removal keys available; consult factory.• Pedestals are keyed randomly

unless otherwise specified. Key numbers available UM226-425.

PH12PH1212PH612PH6612PH6PH66PH666PH6666PMD1212PMD612PMD6612PMD666PMD6666

hanging filehanging file/filehanging box/filehanging box/box/filehanging boxhanging box/boxhanging box/box/boxhanging box/box/box/boxmobile file/filemobile box/filemobile box/box/filemobile box/box/boxmobile box/box/box/box

28 [13]49 [22]41 [19]53 [24]22 [10]33 [15]45 [20]55 [25]84 [38]70 [32]84 [38]75 [34]86 [39]

135/8 [346]255/8 [651]195/8 [498]255/8 [651] 75/8 [194]135/8 [346]195/8 [498]255/8 [651]275/16 [694]223/8 [568]275/16 [694]223/8 [568]275/16 [694]

15 [381]15 [381]15 [381]15 [381]15 [381]15 [381]15 [381]15 [381]15 [381]15 [381]15 [381]15 [381]15 [381]

18 [457]18 [457]18 [457]18 [457]18 [457]18 [457]18 [457]18 [457]22 [559]22 [559] 22 [559]22 [559]22 [559]


PEDESTAL - HANGING & MOBILE

DESCRIPTION • Double-wall drawer fronts and drawer sides.• Drawers feature ball-bearing slides with quick disconnect and anti-

rebound features (full-extension slides on file drawers, 3/4-extension on box drawers).

• Pedestals meet or exceed ANSI-BIFMA standards for safety and • reliability.• Mobile Pedestals include two front locking black casters, two rear

non-locking black casters and have a solid metal top.• Load capacity up to 50 lbs. per drawer, not to exceed 150 lbs. per

unit.

SIDEFRONT


W

H

D

W

H

D

PH PM

7.7

ST

OR

AG

E &

DISP

LA

Y

STORAGE & DISPLAYSTORAGE & DISPLAYwww.symbiote.com 800.283.2434 www.symbiote.com 800.283.2434 Rev. 08.19.14

ACCESSORY MOUNTING BRACKETS

DESCRIPTION • Accessory Mounting Brackets suspend a PD2015, TBDT and PH

drawer from the underside of a 4-Legged Table.• Brackets mount to the bottom of the surface with screws provided in

the Accessory Mounting Bracket hardware pack. • Load capacity 150 lbs. • Finish is black.


NOTES • Works on all table depths with

peds, tote bearers and pencil drawers.

ASMBBK 5 [2]2 [51] 11/4 [32] 16 [408]


SIDEFRONT

D

H

W

7.8

ST

OR

AG

E &

DIS

PL

AY

AN

D


MBEMBDMBSFRONT SIDE

D

NOTES • Frame-mount White Boards cannot

be mounted to solid Panels.• ErgoStat Magnetic White Boards

can only be mounted on Riser Frames.

DESCRIPTION • Each board provides a white erasable writing surface and magnetic

capability on either one or two sides of the workstation.• Frame-mount and ErgoStat® White Boards mount within the opening

of UltraFrames and ErgoStat Riser Frames with two color-matched brackets.

• Frame-mount board brackets allow for boards to be mounted centered or flush with one side of the frame.

• Each White Board includes one black tray and color-matched brackets.

MBS2424MBS2430MBS2436MBS2448MBS2460MBD2424MBD2430MBD2436MBD2448MBD2460MBE1824MBE1830MBE1836

panel-mountpanel-mountpanel-mountpanel-mountpanel-mountframe-mountframe-mountframe-mountframe-mountframe-mount ErgoStatErgoStatErgoStat

11 [5]13 [6]16 [7]21 [10]25 [11]7 [3]9 [4]11 [5]14 [6]20 [9]7 [3]9 [4]11 [5]

24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]18 [464]18 [464]18 [464]

24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]181/4 [464]241/4 [616]301/4 [768]421/4 [1073]541/4 [1378]201/2 [464]261/2 [616]321/2 [768]

1/2 [13]1/2 [13]1/2 [13]1/2 [13]1/2 [13]1/2 [13]1/2 [13]1/2 [13]1/2 [13]1/2 [13]1/2 [13]1/2 [13]1/2 [13]


MAGNETIC WHITE BOARDS

Rev. 03.04.15

H

W

TO ORDER, SPECIFY:1) Product Number2) Finish Standard Standard Finishes: BK Black BT Black Texture* GL Grey Light Smooth GT Grey Light Texture* NW Neutral White ST Sand Texture* * Paint upcharge applies

ELE

CT

RIC

AL &

AIR

8.1ELECTRICAL & AIRELECTRICAL & AIRwww.symbiote.com 800.283.2434 www.symbiote.com 800.283.24348

ELECTRICAL & AIR

Electrical Plug Strips

Electrical Outlet Strips

Utility Mounting Brackets

LED Light and Occupancy Sensor

General Task Lights & Magnification Light

High Performance Task Lights

Cantilever Light Brackets

Shelf Mount Light Brackets

Electrical Distributors

Electrical Distributor Power Cables

Electrical Distributor Receptacles

Data Distributors

Vertical Distributors

Air Strips

Compressed Air Accessories

Air Brackets - Surface Mount

8.28.38.48.58.68.78.88.98.108.148.15 8.168.208.218.228.23

SECTION 8

8.2

ELE

CT

RIC

AL

& A

IR

ELECTRICAL & AIRELECTRICAL & AIRwww.symbiote.com 800.283.2434 www.symbiote.com 800.283.2434

NOTES: • Power cords exit the end of each

strip where the switch is located.• 20 Amp Plug Strips will not plug into Utility Distributors or 15 Amp Plug

Strips.

Rev. 3.20.14

ELECTRICAL PLUG STRIPS - 15 AND 20 AMP

TO ORDER, SPECIFY:1) Product Number2) Finish Standard Finishes: BK Black BT Black Texture* GL Grey Light Smooth GT Grey Light Texture* NW Neutral White ST Sand Texture* * Paint upcharge applies

DESCRIPTION • Plug Strips provide single circuit, 15 Amp or 20 Amp, 110 Volt outlets

where needed on frames.• Each strip includes NEMA configuration 5-15R/5-20R black simplex

receptacles and a 5-15P/5-20P plug. • Strips mount horizontally to frames on hanger clips.• Each strip includes a lighted, rocker-actuated circuit breaker with a

built-in safety guard and an 8' power cord.• One threaded insert located on each end of the Plug Strip allows for the

grounding of dissipative workstation components.• 15 Amp Plug Strips conform to ANSI/UL std.1363 and CSA C22.2.21.

EPS24EPS30EPS36EPS48EPS60EPS72

15 Amp, 4 outlets15 Amp, 5 outlets15 Amp, 6 outlets15 Amp, 8 outlets15 Amp, 10 outlets15 Amp, 15 outlets

3 [1]4 [2]5 [2]6 [3]7 [3]9 [4]

2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]

24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]

2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]


FRONT SIDE

W D

H

EP2024EP2030EP2036EP2048EP2060EP2072

20 Amp, 4 outlets20 Amp, 5 outlets20 Amp, 6 outlets20 Amp, 8 outlets20 Amp, 10 outlets20 Amp, 15 outlets

3 [1]4 [2] 5 [2] 6 [3]7 [3]9 [4]

2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]

24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]

2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]

ELE

CT

RIC

AL &

AIR

8.3ELECTRICAL & AIRELECTRICAL & AIRwww.symbiote.com 800.283.2434 www.symbiote.com 800.283.2434 Rev. 08.11.11

ELECTRICAL OUTLET STRIPS

DESCRIPTION • Strips provide six 15 Amp, 120 Volt outlets where needed.• Each strip includes a lighted on/off switch with integrated circuit breaker,

6' power cord and hook and loop strips for mounting to any flat surface.• EMI/RFI noise filtering.• 15 Amp Outlet Strips are UL listed.• Surge suppression rating: 720 Joules.

TO ORDER, SPECIFY:1) Product Number2) Finish Standard Standard Finishes: BK Black

W D

H

FRONT SIDE

EOS6 2 [1]15/8 [42] 101/4 [267] 11/2 [38]


8.4

ELE

CT

RIC

AL

& A

IR

ELECTRICAL & AIRELECTRICAL & AIRwww.symbiote.com 800.283.2434 www.symbiote.com 800.283.2434Rev. 01.29.09

UTILITY MOUNTING BRACKETS

DESCRIPTION • Pairs of brackets provide easy adaptability to Symbiote stations

for junction boxes and vertical and horizontal mounting of standard Wiremold®, without defacing the framework.

• Steel brackets each have a solid face on which to mount electrical product with self drilling screws. Integral clips hang in 1" increments on frames.

• Pairs of brackets mount adjacent to each other at the juncture of two frames providing flat stationary surfaces on which to mount vertical electrical product and junction boxes with self drilling screws.

• Pairs of brackets also mount opposite each other on frames providing flat surfaces on which to mount horizontal electrical product with self drilling screws.

• Finish is Black.

NOTES: • Sold in pairs. Junction box and horizontal mounting requires one

pair of brackets; vertical mounting requires two pairs.UMB(cat)

W

Front TopD

H

UMBBK 2 [1]45/8 [117] 43/4 [121] 11/3 [34]


UMB(cat)

W

Front TopD

H

W

DH

FRONT TOP


ELE

CT

RIC

AL &

AIR

8.5ELECTRICAL & AIRELECTRICAL & AIRwww.symbiote.com 800.283.2434 www.symbiote.com 800.283.2434 Rev. 03.09.16

LED LIGHTS

DESCRIPTION LED Lights• High output LED lighting provides high efficiency lighting for general tasks.• 3500K temperature, 84CRI and 50,000 hour life span.• Touch-and-hold continuous dimming with 10 hour automatic shut off.• Starter kits include one 60W Power Supply with 12' cord.• Adder kits include the light, (1) 8" and (1) 30" length jumper; Power Supply

not included.• Color is clear anodized aluminum housing with white end caps.Occupancy Sensor• Passive infrared (PIR) integrated occupancy sensor automatically turns off

all interconnected fixtures after 30 minutes of no movement detection.

NOTES: • Includes screw and magnetic

mounting kit complete with adhesive cord managers.

• ETL, TAA and BAA certified.• Additional jumpers sold separately.• End-to-end connectors can be

used between lights in place of a jumper.

• Recommended shelf size: 17" LED Light - 24", 30" and 36" 31" LED Light - 48" and larger 44" LED Light - 60" and larger 58" LED Light - 72"


LEDHS17SVWLEDHS31SVWLEDHS44SVWLEDHS58SVWLEDHA17SVWLEDHA31SVWLEDHA44SVWLEDMSLEDECLEDP60LEDJ08LEDJ30LEDJ54

Starter unitStarter unitStarter unitStarter unitAdder unitAdder unitAdder unitMotion sensorEnd-to-End Connector60 Watt Power Supply8" jumper (interconnect cord)30" jumper (interconnect cord)54" jumper (interconnect cord)

11/4 [.5] 13/4 [.5] 21/4 [1] 23/4 [1] 11/4 [.5] 13/4 [1] 21/4 [1] 1 [.5] 1/4 [.10] 1 [.5] 1/4 [.10] 1/4 [.10] 1/4 [.10]

1/2 [13]1/2 [13] 1/2 [13]1/2 [13]1/2 [13]1/2 [13]1/2 [13]1/2 [13] 1/2 [13]11/4 [33]1/2 [13]1/2 [13]1/2 [13]

744159022902807744

15902290

12.828.442.554.210.923.434.3

161/2 [417]301/8 [765]433/4 [1110]571/2 [1458]161/2 [417]301/8 [765]433/4 [1110] 2 [51] 2 [51] 41/2 [115] 8 [203]30 [762]54 [1372]

2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS Product Height Width Depth WeightNumber Description Lumens Wattage in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] lb. [kg]

Interconnected LED light fixtures must not exceed

60W. Layout combinations are

as follows:

17" LED 31" LED 44" LED 58" LED

QTY QTY QTY QTY

4 0 0 0

3 0 0 0

2 1 0 0

1 1 0 0

1 0 1 0

0 2 0 0

0 0 1 0

0 0 0 1

LEDMS

LEDHA

BOTTOM

W

D

H

SIDE

8.6

ELE

CT

RIC

AL

& A

IR


NOTES • To order United Kingdom (UK13) or European (EU16) Task Lights, specify the

country code after the product number and add the appropriate upcharge, i.e.

L148UK13GL.• General Task Lights do not mount to Cantilever Light Brackets or Shelf

Mount Light Brackets.• If ordering light to be mounted under

a storage cabinet, also order a LSB13 (Light Spring Bar); see page 8.9.

W

D

Top Side

L124(cat)

H

Rev. 08.15.15

W

H

D

L1

DESCRIPTION • Lights provide illumination for general tasks.• Low profile design mounts under Multi-function, Storage, General

Purpose, Center, Wire and Low Profile Shelves, as well as Storage Cabinets, in the flat position.

• Assemblies each include a single T8 cool white fluorescent lamp, electronic ballast, batwing lens, a 9' cord set with center exit and two mounting rails.

GENERAL TASK LIGHTS

MAGNIFICATION LIGHT

W

D

Top Side

L124(cat)

HW

DH

FRONT SIDE

L124L130L136L148

5 [2]7 [3]9 [4]11 [5]

11/2 [38]11/2 [38]11/2 [38]11/2 [38]

181/4 [464]241/4 [616]301/4 [768]361/4 [921]

61/2 [165]61/2 [165]61/2 [165]61/2 [165]


DESCRIPTION • Double-arm adjustable light with a 3-diopter magnification lens.• 9" diameter metal shade houses one 22W fluorescent T9 lamp,

900 lumens (included).• Clamps to edge of work surface.• Color is white.


ML180W 8 [4]311/2 [800] 111/2 [292] 71/2 [190]



ELE

CT

RIC

AL &

AIR


W

D

Top Side

L232S&L232P(cat)

L232S

L232P

H

W

D

Top Side

L232S&L232P(cat)

L232S

L232P

H

NOTES • Mounting brackets sold separately;

see pages 8.8-8.9.• Lights are available for UK

applications with a BS 1363A plug.• Lights are available for EU

applications with a CEE 7/7 "Schuko" plug.

• To order United Kingdom or European Task Lights, consult

factory.

Rev. 05.08.14

HIGH PERFORMANCE TASK LIGHTS

DESCRIPTION • Lights provide illumination for assembly tasks.• Lights mount under shelves with Shelf Mount Light Brackets or to

frames with Cantilever Light Brackets.• Lights include premium triphospherous cool white T5 lamps and a

9' cord with rear right-hand exit.• Lights are available with batwing or glare reducing parabolic lenses

and with two or four lamps.• Four lamp fixtures each have a three-way switch allowing two or four

lamps to be lit.

W

D

Top Side

L232S&L232P(cat)

L232S

L232P

HW

DH

TOP SIDE

L232SEL232PEL432PE3L244SEL244PEL444PE3L256SEL256PEL456PE3L268SEL268PEL468PE3

two lamp, batwingtwo lamp, parabolicfour lamp, parabolictwo lamp, batwingtwo lamp, parabolicfour lamp, parabolictwo lamp, batwingtwo lamp, parabolicfour lamp, parabolictwo lamp, batwingtwo lamp, parabolicfour lamp, parabolic

20 [9]20 [9]22 [11]25 [11]25 [11]27 [12]30 [14]30 [14]32 [15]33 [15]33 [15]35 [16]

2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]

32 [813]32 [813]32 [813]44 [1118]44 [1118]44 [1118]56 [1422]56 [1422]56 [1422]68 [1727]68 [1727]68 [1727]

11 [279]11 [279]11 [279]11 [279]11 [279]11 [279]11 [279]11 [279]11 [279]11 [279]11 [279]11 [279]



L232S L232P

8.8

ELE

CT

RIC

AL

& A

IR


NOTES • Sold in pairs.• Use extended brackets when

shelves 15" deep or greater are mounted below lights.

• Task Lights and Tool Travelers sold separately; see pages 8.7 and

12.13.• General Task Lights do not mount

to Cantilever Light Brackets.• Cantilever Light Brackets allow

lights to span between two adjacent frames that are connected by a Panel Connector as well as mount to individual frames.

D W

Side Front

CBL&CBH(cat)

H

CBH

CBLD W

Side Front

CBL&CBH(cat)

H

CBH

CBL

Rev. 03.03.10

DESCRIPTION • Brackets provide overhead frame-mounted support for High

Performance Task Lights and Overhead Tool Travelers.• Low profile brackets mount flush with the top of frames when mounted

in their highest position.• High profile brackets extend 71/2" above frames when mounted in

their highest position.

CBLCBL30CBHCBH30

low profile, pairlow profile extended, pairhigh profile, pairhigh profile extended, pair

7 [3]10 [5]10 [5]15 [7]

71/2 [191] 71/2 [191] 171/4 [438]171/4 [438]

2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]

201/2 [521]301/2 [775]201/2 [521]30 [762]


CANTILEVER LIGHT BRACKETS

D W

Side Front

CBL&CBH(cat)

H

CBH

CBL

WD

H

FRONTSIDE

CBH CBL



ELE

CT

RIC

AL &

AIR


DESCRIPTION Shelf Mount Light Brackets, Flat and Angled• Brackets mount High Performance Task Lights beneath Multi-

function, Storage, General Purpose, Center, Wire and Low Profile Shelves, as well as Storage Cabinets.

• Brackets provide side-to-side and fore and aft adjustment.• Brackets allow Task Lights to span between two adjacent Storage,

General Purpose, Wire or Low Profile Shelves, as well as Storage Cabinets, when shelves are mounted in the flat position with brackets extending above the shelves.

• Flat Shelf Mount Brackets must be ordered for mounting to shelves in the flat position, and Angled Shelf Mount Brackets must be ordered for mounting to shelves in sloped positions.

Shelf Mount Light Brackets, Laminate Corner Shelf• Brackets mount 32" wide High Performance Task Lights beneath

36" and 48" wide Laminate Corner Shelves.

NOTES • Sold in pairs.• High Performance Task Lights sold separately; see page 8.9.• If ordering light to be mounted

under storage cabinet you will need to order a SMB (Shelf Mount Light Bracket, Flat) along with a LSB13 (Light Spring Bar).

WSMB

SMBA

SMB, WSMB, SMBA(cat)

SMB

WSMB

SMBA


SMB

WSMB

SMBA


SMB

Rev. 12.04.12

SHELF MOUNT LIGHT BRACKETS

SMBSMBAWSMBLSB13

flat, pairangled, paircorner shelf, pairlight spring bar, pair

1 [.5]1 [.5]1 [.5]

3 [76] 51/2 [140] 2 [51]

1/4 [6]1/4 [6]13/4 [44]

10 [254]10 [254]10 [254]121/2 [318]


SMB SMBA

WSMB


8.10

ELE

CT

RIC

AL

& A

IR


DESCRIPTION • Inset-Mount Electrical Distributors provide either single-sided or

double-sided pre-wired electrical distribution throughout workstations.• Inset-Mount style electrical distributors only mount to UltraFrames and

will fit behind work surfaces to function as a surface backstop.• Duplex receptacles are ordered separately and their interchangeability

permits a variety of circuit combinations that can be configured on site.• The eight-wire electrical system is UL Listed as a manufactured

Wiring System (UL183) and UL Recognized as an Office Furnishing Accessory (UL1286).

• The system distributes up to four 20 Amp circuits using 20 Amp duplex receptacles.

NOTES • Duplex receptacles (EDR20) sold separately; see page 8.13.• Electrical Entry (EDEC) and Jumper (EDJ) cables sold separately; see page

8.12.• Electrical Distributors meeting in a 90° degree corner, spanning a three or

four-way connection, or feeding from a Vertical Distributor require mitering of the front cover. To specify a mitered cut to the left or right side of the front cover, substitute a "1" in place of the "0" in the product number depending on left or right side modification, i.e. EDDN4801 is modified for a right cut cover EDSN3610 is modified for a left cut cover.

• To ground dissipative workstation components to the Electrical Distributor order EDGK; see page 5.3.



Rev. 03.07.13

ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTORS - INSET-MOUNT

EDDN EDSN

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS

EDDN2400EDDN3000EDDN3600EDDN4800EDDN6000EDSN2400EDSN3000EDSN3600EDSN4800EDSN6000

double-sided, 2 duplex openingsdouble-sided, 1 duplex openingdouble-sided, 4 duplex openingsdouble-sided, 6 duplex openingsdouble-sided, 8 duplex openingssingle-sided, 1 duplex openingsingle-sided, 1 duplex openingssingle-sided, 2 duplex openingssingle-sided, 3 duplex openingssingle-sided, 4 duplex openings


4 [102]4 [102]4 [102]4 [102]4 [102]4 [102]4 [102]4 [102]4 [102]4 [102]

24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]

31/2 [92]31/2 [92]31/2 [92]31/2 [92]31/2 [92]1 3/4 [46]13/4 [46]13/4 [46]13/4 [46]13/4 [46]

6 [2.5]8 [3.5]10 [4]13 [5.5]16 [7]4 [2]5 [2.5]7 [3]9 [4]12 [5]

FRONT SIDE

FRONT SIDE

D

H

W

W

D

H

EDDN

EDSN

ELE

CT

RIC

AL &

AIR


ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTOR COVERS - INSET-MOUNT



EDCN1

EDCN3

EDCN2EDCN4

EDCN4

DESCRIPTION Distributor Cover• Inset-Mount Electrical Distributor Covers hide conduit connections

between Inset-Mount Electrical Distributors and/or Vertical Distributors.

• Chase Entry Electrical Distributor Covers mount to Electrical Disributors with a "1" style front modification on either the left or right side of the distributor.

• Corner and 3-Way Frame Span Electrical Distributor Covers mount to Electrical Distributors with a "1" style front monification of the distributors on both sides of the cover.

End Cover• As an optional visual cap, the Inset-Mount Electrical Distributor

End Cover can be added to the left or right end (specify L/R) of an Electrical Distributor.

• Includes knock-out tab for cable entry.• Mounts to "0" style (uncut) ends; see page 8.10.

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS

EDCN1EDCN2EDCN3EDCN4LEDCN4R

chase entrycorner3-way frame spanend cover, left-handend-cover, right-hand


4 [102]4 [102]4 [102]37/8 [98]37/8 [98]

33/8 [86]33/8 [86]83/4 [224]23/4 [70]23/4 [70]

3/4 [20]33/8 [86]5 [127]3/4 [18]3/4 [18]

1 [.2]1 [.2]1 [.6]1/2 [.2]1/2 [.2]

Rev. 12.02.14

D

H

W

D

W

HH

W

D

EDCN1 EDCN2EDCN3

H

W

D

8.12

ELE

CT

RIC

AL

& A

IR


DESCRIPTION • Face-Mount Electrical Distributors provide single-sided pre-wired

electrical distribution throughout workstations. • Face-Mount style electrical distributors mount to UltraFrames, Wall

Track or Solid Panels.• Duplex receptacles are ordered separately and their interchangeability

permits a variety of circuit combinations that can be configured on site.• The eight-wire electrical system is UL Listed as a Manufactured

Wiring System (UL183) and UL Recognized as an Office Furnishing Accessory (UL1286).

• The system distributes up to four 20 Amp circuits using 20 Amp duplex receptacles.

NOTES • Duplex receptacles (EDR20) sold separately; see page 8.13.• Electrical Entry (EDEC) and Jumper (EDJ) cables sold separately; see page 8.12.• Electrical Distributors feeding from a Vertical Distributor require modification of

the front cover. Specify a "1" in place of one of the "0" in the product number, depending on left or right side modification, i.e. EDSF4801 is modified for right- hand entry and EDSF3610 is modified for left-hand entry.

• Electrical Distributors meeting in a 90° corner or spanning a three- or four-way connection require mitering of the front cover. To specify a mitered cut to the left or right side of the front cover, substitute a "2" in place of the "0" in the product number depending on left or right side modification, i.e. EDSF4802 is modified for a right cut cover and EDSF3620 is modified for a left cut cover.

• To ground dissipative workstation components to the Electrical Distributor order EDGK; see page 5.2.



EDSF

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS

EDSF2400EDSF3000EDSF3600EDSF4800EDSF6000EDSF7200

single-sided, 1 duplex openingsingle-sided, 1 duplex openingsingle-sided, 2 duplex openingssingle-sided, 3 duplex openingssingle-sided, 4 duplex openingssingle-sided, 4 duplex opening


4 [102]4 [102]4 [102]4 [102]4 [102]4 [102]

24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]

13/4 [46]13/4 [46]13/4 [46]13/4 [46]13/4 [46]13/4 [46]

5 [2]6 [3]8 [3.5]10 [4.5]13 [6]15 [7]

FRONT SIDE

W D

H

ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTORS - FACE-MOUNT

Rev. 03.07.13

ELE

CT

RIC

AL &

AIR


ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTORS - FACE-MOUNT ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTOR COVERS - FACE-MOUNT

Rev. 12.02.14

EDCF1L EDCF4

EDCF4

EDCF3

DESCRIPTION Distributor Cover• Face-Mount Electrical Distributor Covers hide conduit connections

between Face-Mount Electrical Distributors and/or Vertical Distributors.• Chase Entry Electrical Distributor Covers mount to Electrical

Distributors with a "1" style front modification on the left or right side of the distributor.

• 3-Way frame span Electrical Distributor Covers mount to Electrical Distributors with a "2" style front modification on each distributor at a 3-way frame connection.

End Cover• As an optional visual cap, the Face-Mount Electrical Distributor End

Cover is non-handed and mounts to the end of an Electrical Distributor.• Includes knock-out tab for power entry.• Mounts to "0" style (uncut) ends; see page 8.13.



PRODUCT DIMENSIONS

EDCF1LEDCF1REDCF3EDCF4

chase entry, left-handchase entry, right-hand3-way frame spanend cover


4 [102]4 [102]4 [102]37/8 [98]

33/8 [86]33/8 [86]51/2 [140]1 [25]

13/4 [46]13/4 [46]43/4 [120]13/8 [35]

1 [.2]1 [.2]1 [.6]1/2 [.2]

EDCF1 EDCF3

W

D

H

D

H

W

W

H

D

8.14

ELE

CT

RIC

AL

& A

IR


ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTOR POWER CABLES

DESCRIPTION • Metal flex jumpers and entry cables provide power connection of eight-

wire, four-circuit Electrical Distributors in various configurations.• Jumpers and Entry Cables work with all Electrical Distributor styles.• Electrical Entry Cables require hard-wired connection to building power

supply. Each cable is capable of powering 13 Duplex Receptacles per circuit for a total of 52 Duplex Receptacles per Electrical Entry Cable.

• Electrical Jumpers and Entry Cables integrate with an electrical system which is UL Listed as a Manufactured Wiring System (UL183) and UL Recognized as an Office Furnishing Accessory (UL1286).

NOTES • Additional Electrical Jumper and

Entry Cable lengths available; consult factory for ordering information.

• 30" wide electrical distributor requires a longer jumper length on the left end only; specify EDJS6 or EDJT6.


EDEC072EDEC144EDJSEDJTEDJS6EDJT6

entry cableentry cablejumper, frame-to-frame or cornerjumper, three or four-wayjumper, 30" wide distributor left end, frame-to-frame or cornerjumper, 30" wide distributor left end, three- or four-way

3 [1.5]6 [3]1 [.5]1 [.5]1 [.5]1 [.5]

72 [1829]144 [3658]19 [483] 27 [686]25 [635]33 [838]

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS Product Width WeightNumber Description in. [mm] lb. [kg]

EDEC

EDJS

FRAME TO FRAMEEDJS

CORNEREDJS

THREE OR FOUR-WAYFRAME SPAN

EDJT

EDJS

Rev. 03.07.13

ELE

CT

RIC

AL &

AIR


ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTOR POWER CABLES ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTOR RECEPTACLES

DESCRIPTION Receptacles• Duplex Receptacles provide access to circuits 1, 2, 3 and isolated

ground circuit 4 on Electrical Distributors.• Single-depth receptacles must be ordered for Face-Mount Electrical

Distributors (EDSF) and Inset-Mount Single-Sided Electrical Distributors (EDSN). Double-depth receptacles must be specified for Inset-Mount Double-Sided Electrical Distributors (EDDN).

• Maximum of thirteen Duplex Receptacles per circuit per building source.• Electrical Distributor cover and/or internal junction block removal is

required to install and reconfigure Duplex Receptacles within the Electrical Distributor.

• The receptacles integrate with an eight-wire electrical system which is UL Listed as a Manufactured Wiring System (UL183) and UL Recognized as an Office Furnishing Accessory (UL1286).

• Receptacles include circuit identification stamped on the face. Finish for Duplex Receptacles servicing circuits 1, 2 and 3 are Black. Isolated ground circuit 4 Duplex Receptacles are Orange.

Blank Dust Cover• Plastic Dust Cover slides into the junction block of the Electrical

Distributor where the block is not equipped with a Duplex Receptacle.• Blank Dust Cover works with all Electrical Distributor styles.• Finish is Black.

1 [.06]1 [.06]1 [.06]1 [.06]1 [.07]1 [.07]1 [.07]2 [1]1 [.06]

13/4 [45]13/4 [45]13/4 [45]13/4 [45]13/4 [45]13/4 [45]13/4 [45]13/4 [45]13/4 [45]

31/2 [88]31/2 [88]31/2 [88]31/2 [88]31/2 [88]31/2 [88]31/2 [88]31/2 [88]31/2 [88]

11/8 [28]11/8 [28]11/8 [28]11/8 [28]15/8 [41]15/8 [41]15/8 [41]15/8 [41]1/2 [13]

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS Product Height Width Depth WeightNumber Description in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] lb. [kg]EDR20S1BKEDR20S2BKEDR20S3BKEDR20S4OREDR20D1BKEDR20D2BKEDR20D3BKEDR20D40REDRB

single-depth, circuit 1single-depth, circuit 2single-depth, circuit 3single-depth, circuit 4 isolated grounddouble-depth, circuit 1double-depth, circuit 2double-depth, circuit 3double-depth, circuit 4 isolated grounddust cover


W

W

H

H

D

D

EDR20S1BK

EDR20D1BK EDRB

W

H

D

EDR20S40R

EDR20D1BK

EDRB

NOTES • 15 Amp duplex receptacles are also available; consult factory for

ordering information.

Rev. 03.20.12

8.16

ELE

CT

RIC

AL

& A

IR


DATA DISTRIBUTORS - FACE-MOUNT

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS

DDF2400DDF3000DDF3600DDF4800DDF6000DDF7200

1 faceplate cutout per side1 faceplate cutout per side1 faceplate cutout per side1 faceplate cutout per side2 faceplate cutout per side2 faceplate cutout per side


3 [76]3 [76]3 [76]3 [76]3 [76]3 [76]

24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]

13/4 [46]13/4 [46]13/4 [46]13/4 [46]13/4 [46]13/4 [46]

3 [1.5]4 [1.9]5 [2.2]7 [3.0]8 [3.7]10 [4.4]

DESCRIPTION • Face-Mount Data Distributors provide a double-sided chase for

routing data cables throughout workstations.• Face-Mount style data distributors mount to UltraFrames, Wall Track

or Solid Panels.• Cut-outs in the Data Distributor are sized for faceplates with a 3.28"

screw spacing and the clearance in each opening is 2.84" wide by 2.25" high. Faceplates and data jacks are not included. Two #6-32 clip-on nuts are included per opening for faceplate fastening.

• The pass-thru area between adjacent Face-Mount Data Distributors is approximately 3.8 in.2

NOTES • Data Distributors feeding from a Vertical Distributor require modification of

the front cover. Specify a "1" in place of one of the "0" in the product number, depending on the left or right side modification, i.e. DDF3601 is modified for right-hand entry and DDF3610 is modified for left-hand entry.

• Data Distributors meeting in a 90° corner or spanning a three- or four-way connection require mitering of the front cover. Specify a "2" in place of one of the "0" in the product number, depending on left or right side modification, i.e. DDF4802 is modified for a right miter and DDF3620 is modified for a left miter.



W

H

D

Rev. 10.16.12

ELE

CT

RIC

AL &

AIR




DESCRIPTION Router• Face-Mount Data Distributor Routers guide cables at a 2" radius

between Face-Mount Data Distributors and/or Vertical Distributors.• Chase Entry Data Distributor Router mount to Data Distributors with a

"1" style front modification on the left or right side of the distributor.• Two-way Corner and three-way Frame Span Data Distributor Routers

mount to Data Distributors with a "2" style front modification on each distributor.

End Cover• As an optional visual cap, the Face-Mount Data Distributor End

Cover can be added to the left or right end (specify L/R) of a Data Distributor.


PRODUCT DIMENSIONS

DDRF1LDDRF1RDDRF2DDRF3DDCF4

chase entry, left-handchase entry, right-handtwo-way cornerthree-way frame spanend cover


6 [150]6 [150]3 [76]3 [76]27/8 [72]

33/8 [86]33/8 [86]33/4 [94]51/2 [140]1 [25]

13/4 [46]13/4 [46]33/4 [94]103/4 [273]13/8 [35]

1 [.2]1 [.2]1 [.2]2 [.9]1/2 [.2]

NOTES • The DDRF2 contains internal

guides and required mounting hardware and does not have a color finish option.

W

H

D

W

H

D

W

H

H

D

W

D

DDRF2 DDRF3 DDCF4DDRF1

DATA DISTRIBUTOR ROUTERS/END COVERS - FACE-MOUNT

Rev. 12.02.14

8.18

ELE

CT

RIC

AL

& A

IR


PRODUCT DIMENSIONS

DDN2400DDN3000DDN3600DDN4800DDN6000

1 faceplate cutout per side1 faceplate cutout per side1 faceplate cutout per side2 faceplate cutout per side2 faceplate cutout per side


3 [76]3 [76]3 [76]3 [76]3 [76]

24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]

13/4 [46]13/4 [46]13/4 [46]13/4 [46]13/4 [46]

3 [1.4]4 [1.7]5 [2]6 [3]8 [3.4]

DESCRIPTION • Inset-Mount Data Distributors provide a double-sided chase for

routing data cables throughout workstations.• Inset-Mount style data distributors only mount to UltraFrames and will

fit behind work surfaces to function as a surface backstop.• Cut-outs in the Data Distributor are sized for faceplates with a 3.28"

screw spacing and the clearance in each opening is 2.84" wide by 2.25" high. Faceplates and data jacks are not included. Two #6-32 clip-on nuts are included per opening for faceplate fastening.

• The pass-thru area between adjacent Inset-Mount Data Distributors is approximately 1.5 in.2

NOTES • Data Distributors feeding from a Vertical Distributor require modification of

the front cover. Specify a "1" in place of one of the "0" in the product number, depending on the left or right side modification, i.e. DDN4801 is modified for right hand entry and DDN3610 is modified for left-hand entry.



W

H

D

DATA DISTRIBUTORS - INSET-MOUNT

Rev. 11.20.14

ELE

CT

RIC

AL &

AIR


DATA DISTRIBUTORS - INSET-MOUNT DATA DISTRIBUTOR ROUTERS/END COVERS - INSET-MOUNT

W

D

D

W

H

H

DESCRIPTION Router• Inset-Mount Data Distributor Routers guide cables at a 2" radius

between Inset-Mount Data Distributors and Vertical Distributors.• The chase Entry Data Distributor Router mounts to Data Distributors

with a "1" style front modification on either the left or right side of the distributor.

End Cover• As an optional visual cap, the Inset-Mount Data Distributor End

Cover can be added to the left or right end (specify L/R) of a Data Distributor.




PRODUCT DIMENSIONS

DDRN1LDDRN1RDDCN4LDDCN4R

chase entry, left-handchase entry, right-handend cover, left-handend cover, right-hand


3 [76]3 [76]27/8 [72]27/8 [72]

33/8 [86]33/8 [86] 3/4 [18] 3/4 [18]

3/4 [20]3/4 [20]3/4 [18]3/4 [18]

1 [.2] 1 [.2] 1/2 [.2] 1/2 [.2]

DDCN4

DDRN1

Rev. 12.02.14

8.20

ELE

CT

RIC

AL

& A

IR


VERTICAL DISTRIBUTORS

VD126D380FMVD126D380NMVD126D480FMVD126D480NMVD126S280FHVD126S280NHVD126S380FHVD126S380FMVD126S380NHVD126S380NMVD126S480FMVD126S480NM

double mid 3-way, face-mount accessdouble mid 3-way, inset-mount accessdouble mid 4-way, face-mount accessdouble mid 4-way, inset-mount accesssingle handed 2-way, face-mount accesssingle handed 2-way, inset-mount accesssingle handed 3-way, face-mount accesssingle mid 3-way, face-mount accesssingle handed 3-way, inset-mount accesssingle mid 3-way, inset-mount accesssingle mid 4-way, face-mount accesssingle mid 4-way, inset-mount access

129 [58.5]129 [58.5]137 [62]137 [62]80 [36.5]80 [36.5]84 [38]85 [38.5]84 [38]85 [38.5]89 [40.5]89 [40.5]

126 [3200]126 [3200]126 [3200]126 [3200]126 [3200]126 [3200]126 [3200]126 [3200]126 [3200]126 [3200]126 [3200]126 [3200]

151/2 [394]151/2 [394]151/2 [394]151/2 [394]23/4 [70]23/4 [70]23/4 [70]31/2 [89]23/4 [70]31/2 [89]31/2 [89]31/2 [89]

23/4 [70]23/4 [70]31/2 [89]31/2 [89]83/4 [222]83/4 [222]91/2 [241]83/4 [222]91/2 [241]83/4 [222]91/2 [241]91/2 [241]


DESCRIPTION • Vertical Distributors connect UltraFrames with Glides or Panels at 90°

angles while providing concealed chases for dropping electrical and data supply cables.

• Vertical Distributors are available with either a single or double chase area. Each chase area has a cross-sectional clearance of 1.64"x4.37" for cables.

• Cover panels are secured to the Vertical Distributor with 1/4-turn fasteners enabling easy access to installed cabling.

• Vertical Distributors allow entry of power and data cables into Electrical Distributors and/or Data Distributors in adjustable heights ranging from 30" to 60" above the floor. Access Panels vary between Inset-Mount and Face-Mount style Electrical and Data Distributors.

• Vertical Distributors can be configured in the field to connect 48", 62" or 80" high Frames or Panels.

NOTES • For transitions between Electrical Distributors and Vertical Distributors, specify Electrical Distributors with a chase entry cut

end; see pages 8.10-8.11. To order Electrical Distributor Chase Entry Cover, consult factory. • For transitions and cable bend radius control between Data Distributors and Vertical Distributors, specify Data Distributors

with a chase entry cut end; see pages 8.14-8.15. To order Data Distributor Entry Router separately, consult factory.



W

D

D

WH

DOUBLE

SINGLEVD126D

Rev. 01.13.12

ELE

CT

RIC

AL &

AIR


NOTES • Compressed Air Entry/End Kits (CAEK) and Compressed Air Tube Kits (CATK)

sold separately; see page 8.22.• Additional Quick Disconnect (QD) Fittings and Accessories sold separately for

field installation of other combinations of fittings; see page 8.22.• Only 48" and 60" Air Strips have left middle (LM) and right middle (RM) locations

for QD fittings. They install in position 2 only. The 24", 30" and 36" strips can accommodate two QD fittings; 48" and 60" accommodate four QD fittings.

AS36SL2SR2

AS36SL1SR1

W D

Front Side

AS(cat)

AS36FL1FR1

H

AS36SL2SR2

AS36SL1SR1

W D

Front Side

AS(cat)

AS36FL1FR1

H

AS36SL2SR2

AS36SL1SR1

W D

Front Side

AS(cat)

AS36FL1FR1

H

DESCRIPTION • Air Strips distribute compressed air or low pressure vacuum service

in workstations.• Each strip includes two single swivel or two single fixed 1/4" Quick

Disconnect Fittings in locations left front (L1) and right front (R1) or left bottom (L2) and right bottom (R2). Other combinations can be field installed by purchasing additional components.

• Strips include bulkhead unions on each end with push-in fittings for 1/2" OD tube for connection of adjacent strips and connection to building air sources.



AS24FL1FR1AS24SL1SR1AS24SL2SR2AS30FL1FR1AS30SL1SR1AS30SL2SR2AS36FL1FR1AS36SL1SR1AS36SL2SR2AS48FL1FR1AS48SL1SR1AS48SL2SR2AS60FL1FR1AS60SL1SR1AS60SL2SR2

fixed left & right, frontswivel left & right, frontswivel left & right, bottomfixed left & right, frontswivel left & right, frontswivel left & right, bottomfixed left & right, frontswivel left & right, frontswivel left & right, bottomfixed left & right, frontswivel left & right, frontswivel left & right, bottomfixed left & right, frontswivel left & right, frontswivel left & right, bottom

11 [5]11 [5]11 [5]12 [6]12 [6]12 [6]13 [6]13 [6]13 [6]14 [6]14 [6]14 [6]15 [7]15 [7]15 [7]

31/4 [83]31/4 [83]31/4 [83]31/4 [83]31/4 [83]31/4 [83]31/4 [83]31/4 [83]31/4 [83]31/4 [83]31/4 [83]31/4 [83]31/4 [83]31/4 [83]31/4 [83]

24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]48 [1219]48 [1219]48 [1219]60 [1524]60 [1524]60 [1524]

2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]


AS36FL1FR1 AS36SL1SR1AS36SL2SR2

AIR STRIPS

AS36SL2SR2

AS36SL1SR1

W D

Front Side

AS(cat)

AS36FL1FR1

HW D

H

FRONT SIDE

QD LOCATIONS

LLM

RMR

1

2

QD POSITIONS

Rev. 08.12.14

8.22

ELE

CT

RIC

AL

& A

IR


COMPRESSED AIR ACCESSORIESDESCRIPTION Compressed Air Entry/End Kits (CAEK)• CAEKs provide air connection to building air supplies and provide termination for runs.• One kit is required for each entry and end of single or multiple runs of Utility Distributors or Air Strips.• Kits each include 60" of 1/2" OD nylon tubing, a 1/4" by 3/8" FPT nipple, a 1/2" push-in by 3/8" MPT straight

adapter and a termination plug.

Compressed Air Tube Kits (CATK)• CATKs provide additional tubing to install compressed air service to workstations; order to connect adjacent

Utility Distributors or Air Strips in a run.• Kits each include fifty feet of 1/2" OD nylon tubing and a Tube Cutter.

Compressed Air Coiled Tube Kits (CAC)• CACs provide for flexible delivery of compressed air from Tool Travelers to air tools in workstations.• Kits each include 60" of 1/4" ID coiled poly tube with a 1/4" Quick Disconnect fitting on one end for attachment

to an air tool and a 1/4" push-in by 1/4" MPT straight adapter on other end for attachment to the Tool Traveler Car.

Tube Cutters (TCUT)• Required to make straight cuts in nylon tube for proper connection of air fittings on Utility Distributors and Air

Strips.

Termination Plugs (TPLUG)• Plastic plugs enclose the ends of 1/2" OD nylon tube to terminate air runs.

NPT Straight Adapters (NPT)• The 1/2" push-in by 3/8" MPT straight adapters attach to the 1/2" OD nylon tube on Utility Distributors and Air

Strips allowing connection to building air supplies.

Elbow and Tee Connectors (ELB1/2, TEE1/2)• Elbows provide two 1/2" push-in fittings and Tees provide three 1/2" push-in fittings to connect 1/2" OD nylon

tube together in 90° or three-way conditions.

Quick Disconnect Fittings • Fittings provide compressed air or low pressure vacuum service in Utility Distributors or Air Strips.• The 1/4" Quick Disconnect Fittings come assembled with all parts needed to add fittings to Utility Distributors

or Air Strips in the field.• Only one fitting can be installed per location on Utility Distributors or Air Strips.

CAEKCATKCACTCUTTPLUGNPTELB1/2TEE1/2CADF-1/4CADS-1/4CADDS-1/4

compressed air entry/end kitcompressed air tube kitcompressed air coil tube kittube cuttertermination plug, 5 packNPT straight adapter, 5 packelbow connector 90°

tee connector three-wayquick disconnect, single fixedquick disconnect, single swivelquick disconnect, double swivel

2 [1]15 [7]3 [1]1 [.1]1 [.1]1 [5]1 [.1]1 [.1]3 [1]3 [1]6 [3]


Rev. 01.29.09

ELE

CT

RIC

AL &

AIR


DESCRIPTION Tool Holster Brackets (THOL)• Brackets suspend small hand tools beneath surfaces.

Tool Holster Brackets with Compressed Air (THOL1/4)• Brackets suspend small air tools beneath surfaces.• Assemblies each include a fixed 1/4" Quick Disconnect Fitting, 72" of

1/2" tubing, a 1/2" push-in by 3/8" MPT straight adapter and a 1/4" by 3/8" FPT nipple.

• Assemblies connect to Quick Disconnect Fittings, Air Strip bulkhead fittings or building supplies.

Surface Brackets with Compressed Air (CABF1/4)• Brackets suspend compressed air Quick Disconnect Fittings beneath

surfaces. • Assemblies each include a fixed 1/4" Quick Disconnect Fitting, 72" of

1/2" tubing, a 1/2" push-in by 3/8" MPT straight adapter and a 1/4" by 3/8" FPT nipple.

• Assemblies connect to Quick Disconnect Fittings, Air Strip bulkhead fittings or building supplies.

NOTES • Finish is stainless steel on all

brackets.

W D

H

FRONT SIDE


AIR BRACKETS - SURFACE MOUNT

THOLTHOL1/4CABF1/4

tool holstertool holster, airsurface bracket, air

3 [1]6 [3]6 [3]

21/2 [64]21/2 [64] 2 [51]

4 [102]4 [102]4 [102]

31/4 [83]31/4 [83]21/2 [64]


THOL1/4 THOL

CABF1/4

CADF 1/4

CADDS 1/4

CADS 1/4

Rev. 01.29.09



2015

9.1

CA

BLE M

AN

AG

EMEN

T

CABLE MANAGEMENTCABLE MANAGEMENTwww.symbiote.com 800.283.2434 www.symbiote.com 800.283.24349

CABLE MANAGEMENT

Cable Ducts

Cable Ring Ducts

Cable Trays - Frame Mount

Cable Trays - Universal

Uniclips & D-rings

9.29.39.49.59.6

SECTION 9

NOTES: • Self mount and top mount Cable Ducts can be cut to size in the field.• UL recognized, CSA certified. PVC duct carries a UL flammability rating of 94V-O.

9.2

CA

BLE

MA

NA

GEM

ENT


CABLE DUCTS

W

Front Side

H D

CDF30BK

CDF24BK

CDF48BK CDFV72BK

CDC72BK

CDF,CDFV,CDC (cat)

WDH

FRONT SIDE

DESCRIPTION • Cable Ducts provide vertical and horizontal cable management in workstations.• Composed of PVC slotted duct with flush mount duct covers that snap on and off for easy access.• Frame-mounted Cable Ducts are fastened to painted steel plates. Assemblies mount vertically on the centerline of two inline frames or horizontally on frames with hanger clips.• Frame-mounted Cable Ducts also fasten vertically on the inside of 80" and 96" high UltraFrames to captivators.• One 48" frame mounted Cable Duct per side mounts to captivators inside 80" high UltraFrames. One 24" and one 48", two 36" or one 72" Cable Duct per side mounts to captivators inside 96" high Ultra Frames.• Vertical mount Cable Ducts fasten off center of two inline frames with three hanger clips and plates.• Top-mount Cable Ducts fasten to captivators in top cross members of 80" and 96" high UltraFrames with #10-24 screws.• Self mount Cable Ducts attach anywhere on frames with pressure sensitive adhesive tape for temporary or permanent mounting.• Cable Ducts feature 5/8" scored fingers providing additional access for cable leads. • Finish is Black.


CDF24BKCDF30BKCDF36BKCDF48BKCDF60BKCDF72BKCDFV72BKCDS72BKCDC72BK

frame-mountedframe-mountedframe-mountedframe-mountedframe-mountedframe-mountedvertical mountself mounttop mount

4 [2]5 [2]6 [3]8 [4]10 [5]12 [5]5 [2]5 [2]5 [2]

2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]

24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]72 [1829]72 [1829]72 [1829]

4 [102]4 [102]4 [102]4 [102]4 [102]4 [102]4 [102]4 [102]4 [102]


Rev. 01.29.09

W

Front Side

H D

CDF30BK

CDF24BK

CDF48BK CDFV72BK

CDC72BK

CDF,CDFV,CDC (cat)

CDC72BK

CDF48BK CDFV72BK

CDF24BK

CDF30BK

W

Front Side

H D

CRD24(cat)

NOTES: • Two vertical Cable Ring Ducts can mount adjacently at the juncture of two frames.• Special hole patterns allow the ends of perpendicularly mounted Cable Ring Ducts and 12 Port Data Chases to stack sharing common frame space. 60" and 72" Cable Ring Ducts have a third set of holes near the center of their length allowing for this perpendicular stacking.

9.3

CA

BLE M

AN

AG

EMEN

T


CABLE RING DUCTS

W

Front Side

H D

CRD24(cat)

WDH

FRONT SIDE

DESCRIPTION • Cable Ring Ducts provide easy access to bulk cable management.• Openings on each ring allow for easy access and clearance of cables while the angle of the opening restrains the cables once in place.• Ducts mount horizontally or vertically to frames on hanger clips.• Ducts mount vertically on the inside or horizontally on the top of 80" and 96" high UltraFrames to captivators.• One 48" Cable Ring Duct per side mounts to captivators inside 80" high UltraFrames. One 24" and one 48", two 36" or one 72" Cable Ring Duct per side mounts to captivators inside 96" high Ultra Frames.• Top captivators accommodate Cable Ring Ducts the same width as the respective frames or run of frames. For example, a 48" Cable Ring Duct can be mounted across the top of a 48" wide frame or across the top of two adjacent 24" wide frames.• Finish is Black Texture.


CRD24BTCRD30BTCRD36BTCRD48BTCRD60BTCRD72BT

3 rings4 rings5 rings7 rings9 rings11 rings

2 [1]3 [1]3 [1]4 [2]5 [2]6 [3]

2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]

24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]

3 [76]3 [76]3 [76]3 [76]3 [76]3 [76]


Rev. 01.29.09



CTF24(cat)

W D

H

Front Side

9.4

CA

BLE

MA

NA

GEM

ENT


CABLE TRAYS - FRAME MOUNT

CTF24(cat)

W D

H

Front Side

W D

H

FRONT SIDE

DESCRIPTION • Cable Trays provide horizontal cable management in workstations.• Trays mount to frames and adjust vertically in 1" increments.• Steel trays have 45° angled ends to allow for corner configurations and bottom openings for cable access.

CTF24CTF30CTF36CTF48CTF60CTF72

5 [2]6 [3]8 [4]10 [5]12 [5]14 [6]

8 [203]8 [203]8 [203]8 [203]8 [203]8 [203]

24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]

23/4 [70]23/4 [70]23/4 [70]23/4 [70]23/4 [70]23/4 [70]


Rev. 03.03.10

NOTES: • Universal Cable Trays can be used together with Surface Back Stops, which are sold separately; see page 4.30.• Cable Trays cannot be mounted flush to the back of Laminate Corner Shelves.• Cable Tray Use With CTUABT 24" frames, 36" Table Bases and ErgoStats™, CTUBBT 30" frames CTUCBT 36" frames, 48" Table Bases and ErgoStats™ CTUDBT 48" frames, 60" Table Bases and ErgoStats™ CTUEBT 60" frames, 72" Table Bases and ErgoStats™CTUABT(cat)

W D

H

Ultra Frame

ErgoStatTM


DESCRIPTION • Cable Trays provide horizontal storage for electrical cords and communication cabling below Ultra Surfaces and Laminate Corner Shelves.• Trays fasten to the bottom of surfaces and can be positioned to the centerline of UltraFrames or mounted flush to the back of surfaces for applications with solid Panels, ErgoStat™ Riser Frames and Table Bases.• Finish is Black Texture.

CTUABT(cat)

W D

H

Ultra Frame

ErgoStatTM

W D

H

UltraFrame

ERGOSTAT

9.5

CA

BLE M

AN

AG

EMEN

T


CABLE TRAYS - UNIVERSAL

Rev. 09.09.09

CTUABTCTUBBTCTUCBTCTUDBTCTUEBT

4 [2]5 [2]6 [3]8 [4]10 [5]

43/4 [121]43/4 [121]43/4 [121]43/4 [121]43/4 [121]

171/2 [445]231/2 [597]291/2 [749]411/2 [1054]531/2 [1359]

33/4 [95]33/4 [95]33/4 [95]33/4 [95]33/4 [95]


NOTES: • D-rings can also be mounted directly to the EIA units of Rack Modules.

UCP

DSIDE

TOP

W

H

UCD

SIDE

TOP

W

D

H

UCD

9.6

CA

BLE

MA

NA

GEM

ENT



UNICLIPS AND D-RINGS

DESCRIPTION Uniclips• Uniclips provide for the mounting of D-rings and other components containing a 13/4" spaced mounting hole pattern. This hole pattern lines up with EIA units of standard racks.• Components with a single mounting hole such as conduit rings can also be mounted.• Steel plates are tapped for 1/4 -20 screws and the hole pattern allows for components to be mounted in a variety of locations. Integral clips hang in 1" increments on frames and can be spaced according to user requirements.

D-rings• D-rings mount to Uniclips in several different locations providing vertical or horizontal cable management.• Plastic rings can be mounted on the left or right sides of the Uniclips providing vertical cable management on both the left and right sides for double vertical runs of cables.• Rings can be mounted on the top or bottom of the Uniclips providing frame-to-frame horizontal cable management on both the top and bottom for double horizontal runs of cables.• Interior dimensions of the 1" D-ring are 11/4" wide by 21/2" deep and the 2" D-ring are 21/2 “ wide by 21/2 “ deep.• Gap in ring shifts aside for easy access to cables.

UCPBKUCD1BKUCD2BK

Uniclip, 5 pack1" D-ring, 5 pack2" D-ring, 5 pack

3 [1]1/4 [.1]1/2 [.2]

25/8 [67]23/8 [60]23/8 [60]

31/2 [89]2 [51]31/4 [83]

1/2 [13]31/4 [83]31/4 [83]


Rev. 01.29.09

10.1

LA

B P

RO

DU

CT

S

LAB PRODUCTSLAB PRODUCTSwww.symbiote.com 800.283.2434 www.symbiote.com 800.283.243410

LAB PRODUCTS10.210.410.710.910.1210.1310.1610.1710.1910.2010.2110.2210.2310.2410.2510.2610.2710.2810.2910.3010.3110.32

SECTION 10

Double Drawer Double Door

Single Drawer Single Door

Single Door

Double Door

Open Unit

Drawers, Sitting Height

Suspended Base Cabinet Mounting Brackets

Drawers, Standing Height

Bottle Drawer Cabinets

Sink Base

Glass Door

Solid Door

Floor Case

Wall Strips

Cantilever Brackets

Lab Height B Supports

Lab Legs

Adjacent Brackets

Lab Reinforcement Bars

Phenolic Surfaces

Lab Leg Panels

Cabinet and Lab Leg Fillers

Base Cabinet

Sink Base

Wall Case

Floor Case

10.2

LA

B P

RO

DU

CT

S


MOBILE BASE CABINETS - DOUBLE DRAWER DOUBLE DOOR

DESCRIPTION • Cabinets are constructed of welded 18 and 20 gauge steel with a

chemical resistant epoxy powder coat paint finish.• Cabinets are constructed of welded 18 and 20 gauge steel with a

chemical resistant epoxy powder coat paint finish.• Drawers have full-extension ball bearing, plated drawer slides. • Doors have 5-knuckle stainless steel institutional type hinges.• Sound deadened doors and drawers have "double pan" construction

with a bar pull.• A removable bottom pan and a single full-depth adjustable shelf is

included with each cabinet. Additional shelves are available, consult factory

• Built to SEFA standards.• Available with or without locks. Standard cam lock cores are not are

not removable.• Mobile units have a solid steel top and back with two front total lock

casters and two rear swivel casters.

LUCB2930C2DBNLUCB2936C2DBNLUCB2942C2DBNLUCB2948C2DBNLUCB3530C2DBNLUCB3536C2DBNLUCB3542C2DBNLUCB3548C2DBNLUCB2930C2DBLLUCB2936C2DBLLUCB2942C2DBLLUCB2948C2DBLLUCB3530C2DBLLUCB3536C2DBLLUCB3542C2DBLLUCB3548C2DBL

sitting height, non-lockingsitting height, non-lockingsitting height, non-lockingsitting height, non-lockingstanding height, non-lockingstanding height, non-lockingstanding height, non-lockingstanding height, non-lockingsitting height, lockingsitting height, lockingsitting height, lockingsitting height, lockingstanding height, lockingstanding height, lockingstanding height, lockingstanding height, locking

116 [53]126 [57]136 [62]151 [68]146 [66]156 [71]171 [78]181 [82]116 [53]126 [57]136 [62]151 [68]146 [66]156 [71]171 [78]181 [82]

29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]

30 [762]36 [914]42 [1067]48 [1219]30 [762]36 [914]42 [1067]48 [1219]30 [762]36 [914]42 [1067]48 [1219]30 [762]36 [914]42 [1067]48 [1219]

217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]


NOTES: • For proper layout dimensioning

of base cabinets refer to the Lab Planning Guide.

• Base Cabiners can be used in conjunction with UltraFrame, lab legs and support brackets; see pages 2.2, 10.24-10.26.

• Recessed pulls available; consult factory for ordering information.

Rev. 03.29.10

W D

H

FRONT SIDE


10.3

LA

B P

RO

DU

CT

S


STATIONARY BASE CABINETS - DOUBLE DRAWER DOUBLE DOOR


chemical resistant epoxy powder coat paint finish.• Drawers have full-extension ball bearing, plated drawer slides.• Doors have 5-knuckle stainless steel institutional type hinges.• Sound deadened doors and drawers have "double pan" construction


included with each cabinet. Additional shelves are available, consult factory.

• Built to SEFA standards.• Available with or without locks. Standard cam lock cores are not

removable.• Stationary units are open on top, with a removable back panel and

include leveling glides.

LUCB2930G2DBNLUCB2936G2DBNLUCB2942G2DBNLUCB2948G2DBNLUCB3530G2DBNLUCB3536G2DBNLUCB3542G2DBNLUCB3548G2DBNLUCB2930G2DBLLUCB2936G2DBLLUCB2942G2DBLLUCB2948G2DBLLUCB3530G2DBLLUCB3536G2DBLLUCB3542G2DBLLUCB3548G2DBL

sitting height, non-lockingsitting height, non-lockingsitting height, non-lockingsitting height, non-lockingstanding height, non-lockingstanding height, non-lockingstanding height, non-lockingstanding height, non-locking-sitting height, lockingsitting height, lockingsitting height, lockingsitting height, lockingstanding height, lockingstanding height, lockingstanding height, lockingstanding height, locking

110 [50]120 [54]141 [64]145 [66]140 [64]150 [68]165 [75]175 [79]110 [50]120 [54]141 [64]145 [66]140 [64]150 [68]165 [75]175 [79]

29 [737] 29 [737] 29 [737] 29 [737] 35 [889] 35 [889] 35 [889] 35 [889] 29 [737] 29 [737] 29 [737] 29 [737] 35 [889] 35 [889] 35 [889] 35 [889]

30 [762]36 [914]42 [1067]48 [1219]30 [762]36 [914]42 [1067]48 [1219]30 [762]36 [914]42 [1067]48 [1219]30 [762]36 [914]42 [1067]48 [1219]

217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]




• Base cabinets can be used in conjunction with UltraFrame, lab legs and support brackets; see pages 2.2, 10.24-10.26.


Rev. 03.29.10


W D

H

FRONT SIDE

10.4

LA

B P

RO

DU

CT

S


MOBILE BASE CABINETS - SINGLE DRAWER SINGLE DOOR






removable.• Mobile units have a solid steel top and back with two front total lock


LUCB2918C1LBNLUCB2918C1RBNLUCB2924C1LBNLUCB2924C1RBNLUCB3518C1LBNLUCB3518C1RBNLUCB3524C1LBNLUCB3524C1RBNLUCB2918C1LBLLUCB2918C1RBLLUCB2924C1LBLLUCB2924C1RBLLUCB3518C1LBLLUCB3518C1RBLLUCB3524C1LBLLUCB3524C1RBL

sitting height, left hinged, non-lockingsitting height, right hinged, non-lockingsitting height, left hinged, non-lockingsitting height, right hinged, non-lockingstanding height, left hinged, non-lockingstanding height, right hinged, non-lockingstanding height, left hinged, non-lockingstanding height, right hinged, non-lockingsitting height, left hinged, lockingsitting height, right hinged, lockingsitting height, left hinged, lockingsitting height, right hinged, lockingstanding height, left hinged, lockingstanding height, right hinged, lockingstanding height, left hinged, lockingstanding height, right hinged, locking

86 [39]86 [39]96 [44]96 [44]101 [46]101 [46]111 [50]111 [50]86 [39]86 [39]96 [44]96 [44]101 [46]101 [46]111 [50]111 [50]

29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]

18 [457]18 [457]24 [610]24 [610]18 [457]18 [457]24 [610]24 [610]18 [457]18 [457]24 [610]24 [610]18 [457]18 [457]24 [610]24 [610]

217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]






Rev. 03.29.10

W D

H

FRONT SIDE


10.5

LA

B P

RO

DU

CT

S


STATIONARY BASE CABINETS - SINGLE DRAWER SINGLE DOOR








LUCB2918G1LBNLUCB2918G1RBNLUCB2924G1LBNLUCB2924G1RBNLUCB3518G1LBNLUCB3518G1RBNLUCB3524G1LBNLUCB3524G1RBNLUCB2918G1LBLLUCB2918G1RBLLUCB2924G1LBLLUCB2924G1RBLLUCB3518G1LBLLUCB3518G1RBLLUCB3524G1LBLLUCB3524G1RBL


80 [36]80 [36]90 [41]90 [41]95 [43]95 [43]105 [48]105 [48]80 [36]80 [36]90 [41]90 [41]95 [43]95 [43]105 [48]105 [48]

29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]

18 [457]18 [457]24 [610]24 [610]18 [457]18 [457]24 [610]24 [610]18 [457]18 [457]24 [610]24 [610]18 [457]18 [457]24 [610]24 [610]

217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]






Rev. 03.29.10

W D

H

FRONT SIDE


10.6

LA

B P

RO

DU

CT

S


SUSPENDED BASE CABINETS - DRAWER/DOOR

DESCRIPTION • Suspended Base Cabinets can be hung from the underside of

worksurfaces and 4-Legged Table Cabinet Mounting Brackets.• Cabinets are constructed of welded 18 and 20 gauge steel with a





removable.• Units are open on top and have a solid steel back panel.

LUCB2518S1LBNLUCB2518S1RBNLUCB2524S1LBNLUCB2524S1RBNLUCB2518S1LBLLUCB2518S1RBLLUCB2524S1LBLLUCB2524S1RBLLUCB2530S2DBNLUCB2536S2DBNLUCB2542S2DBNLUCB2548S2DBNLUCB2530S2DBLLUCB2536S2DBLLUCB2542S2DBLLUCB2548S2DBL

sitting height, left hinged, non-lockingsitting height, right hinged, non-lockingsitting height, left hinged, non-lockingsitting height, right hinged, non-lockingsitting height, left hinged, lockingsitting height, right hinged, lockingsitting height, left hinged, lockingsitting height, right hinged, lockingsitting height, non-lockingsitting height, non-lockingsitting height, non-lockingsitting height, non-lockingsitting height, lockingsitting height, lockingsitting height, lockingsitting height, locking

86 [39]86 [39]111 [50]111 [50]96 [44]96 [44]101 [46]101 [46]110 [50]120 [54]141 [64]151 [78]110 [50]120 [54]141 [64]151 [78]

25 [635]25 [635]25 [635]25 [635]25 [635]25 [635]25 [635]25 [635]25 [635]25 [635]25 [635]25 [635]25 [635]25 [635]25 [635]25 [635]

18 [457]18 [457]24 [610]24 [610]18 [457]18 [457]24 [610]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]42 [1067]48 [1220]30 [762]36 [914]42 [1067]48 [1220]

217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]


NOTES: • Load capacity (includes cabinet and

content) cannot exceed 500 lbs. Load capacity of the suspended cabinet does not supercede support component load rating.

• The suspended component(s) reduces the surface load capacity by an amount equal to the suspended component and its contents.


• 4-Legged Table Cabinet Mounting Brackets ordered separately.

W

W

D

D

H

H

FRONT

FRONT

SIDE

SIDE


Rev. 07.21.15

LUCB2442S2DBN

LUCB2518S1RBL

10.7

LA

B P

RO

DU

CT

S

LAB PRODUCTSLAB PRODUCTSwww.symbiote.com 800.283.2434 www.symbiote.com 800.283.2434Rev. 03.29.10

MOBILE BASE CABINETS - SINGLE DOOR

LUCB2918C0LBNLUCB2918C0RBNLUCB2924C0LBNLUCB2924C0RBNLUCB3518C0LBNLUCB3518C0RBNLUCB3524C0LBNLUCB3524C0RBNLUCB2918C0LBLLUCB2918C0RBLLUCB2924C0LBLLUCB2924C0RBLLUCB3518C0LBLLUCB3518C0RBLLUCB3524C0LBLLUCB3524C0RBL


81 [37]81 [37]91 [41]91 [41]91 [41]91 [41]101 [46]101 [46]81 [37]81 [37]91 [41]91 [41]91 [41]91 [41]101 [46]101 [46]

29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]

18 [457]18 [457]24 [610]24 [610]18 [457]18 [457]24 [610]24 [610]18 [457]18 [457]24 [610]24 [610]18 [457]18 [457]24 [610]24 [610]

217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]



chemical resistant epoxy powder coat paint finish.• Doors have 5-knuckle stainless steel institutional type hinges.• Sound deadened doors have "double pan" construction with a bar

pull.• A removable bottom pan and a single full-depth adjustable shelf is










W D

H

FRONT SIDE

Rev. 03.29.10

10.8

LA

B P

RO

DU

CT

S


STATIONARY BASE CABINETS - SINGLE DOOR

LUCB2918G0LBNLUCB2918G0RBNLUCB2924G0LBNLUCB2924G0RBNLUCB3518G0LBNLUCB3518G0RBNLUCB3524G0LBNLUCB3524G0RBNLUCB2918G0LBLLUCB2918G0RBLLUCB2924G0LBLLUCB2924G0RBLLUCB3518G0LBLLUCB3518G0RBLLUCB3524G0LBLLUCB3524G0RBL


75 [34]75 [34]85 [39]85 [39]85 [39]85 [39]95 [43]95 [43]75 [34]75 [34]85 [39]85 [39]85 [39]85 [39]95 [43]95 [43]

29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]

18 [457]18 [457]24 [610]24 [610]18 [457]18 [457]24 [610]24 [610]18 [457]18 [457]24 [610]24 [610]18 [457]18 [457]24 [610]24 [610]

217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]














W D

H

FRONT SIDE

Rev. 03.26.10

10.9

LA

B P

RO

DU

CT

S


MOBILE BASE CABINETS - DOUBLE DOOR

Rev. 03.29.10

LUCB2930C0DBNLUCB2936C0DBNLUCB2942C0DBNLUCB2948C0DBNLUCB3530C0DBNLUCB3536C0DBNLUCB3542C0DBNLUCB3548C0DBNLUCB2930C0DBLLUCB2936C0DBLLUCB2942C0DBLLUCB2948C0DBLLUCB3530C0DBLLUCB3536C0DBLLUCB3542C0DBLLUCB3548C0DBL


111 [50]121 [55]131 [59]141 [64]131 [59]136 [62]156 [71]161 [73]111 [50]121 [55]131 [59]141 [64]131 [59]136 [62]156 [71]161 [73]

29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]

30 [762]36 [914]42 [1067]48 [1219]30 [762]36 [914]42 [1067]48 [1219]30 [762]36 [914]42 [1067]48 [1219]30 [762]36 [914]42 [1067]48 [1219]

217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]






• Built to SEFA standards. • Available with or without locks. Standard cam lock cores are not








W D

H

FRONT SIDE

Rev. 03.29.10

10.10

LA

B P

RO

DU

CT

S


STATIONARY BASE CABINETS - DOUBLE DOOR

LUCB2930G0DBNLUCB2936G0DBNLUCB2942G0DBNLUCB2948G0DBNLUCB3530G0DBNLUCB3536G0DBNLUCB3542G0DBNLUCB3548G0DBNLUCB2930G0DBLLUCB2936G0DBLLUCB2942G0DBLLUCB2948G0DBLLUCB3530G0DBLLUCB3536G0DBLLUCB3542G0DBLLUCB3548G0DBL


105 [48]115 [52]125 [57]135 [61]125 [57]130 [59]150 [68]155 [70]105 [48]115 [52]125 [57]135 [61]125 [57]130 [59]150 [68]155 [70]

29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]

30 [762]36 [914]42 [1067]48 [1219]30 [762]36 [914]42 [1067]48 [1219]30 [762]36 [914]42 [1067]48 [1219]30 [762]36 [914]42 [1067]48 [1219]

217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]














W D

H

FRONT SIDE

Rev. 03.29.10Rev. 03.26.10

10.11

LA

B P

RO

DU

CT

S


SUSPENDED BASE CABINETS - SINGLE AND DOUBLE DOOR


worksurfaces and 4-Legged Table Cabinet Mounting Brackets.• Cabinets are constructed of welded 18 and 20 gauge steel with a





removable.• Units are open on top and have a solid back panel.

LUCB2518S0LBNLUCB2518S0RBNLUCB2524S0LBNLUCB2524S0RBNLUCB2518S0LBLLUCB2518S0RBLLUCB2524S0LBLLUCB2524S0RBLLUCB2530S0DBNLUCB2536S0DBNLUCB2542S0DBNLUCB2548S0DBNLUCB2530S0DBLLUCB2536S0DBLLUCB2542S0DBLLUCB2548S0DBL

sitting height, left hinged, non-lockingsitting height, right hinged, non-lockingsitting height, left hinged, non-lockingsitting height, right hinged, non-lockingsitting height, left hinged, lockingsitting height, right hinged, lockingsitting height, left hinged, lockingsitting height, right hinged, lockingsitting height, double door, non-lockingsitting height, double door, non-lockingsitting height, double door, non-lockingsitting height, double door, non-lockingsitting height, double door, lockingsitting height, double door, lockingsitting height, double door, lockingsitting height, double door, locking

86 [39]86 [39]101 [46]101 [46]86 [39]86 [39]101 [46]101 [46]111 [50]121 [55]131 [59]141 [64]131 [59]136 [62]156 [71]161 [73]

25 [635]25 [635]25 [635]25 [635]25 [635]25 [635]25 [635]25 [635]25 [635]25 [635]25 [635]25 [635]25 [635]25 [635]25 [635]25 [635]

18 [457]18 [457]24 [610]24 [610]18 [457]18 [457]24 [610]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]42 [1067]48 [1219]30 [762]36 [914]42 [1067]48 [1219]

217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]








W

W

D

D

H

H

FRONT

FRONT

SIDE

SIDE

Rev. 07.21.15

LUCB2542S0DBNLUCB2518S0RBL

10.12

LA

B P

RO

DU

CT

S


STATIONARY BASE CABINETS - OPEN UNIT


chemical resistant epoxy powder coat paint finish.• Built to SEFA standards.• A removable bottom pan and a single full-depth adjustable shelf is





• Open unit is only available with glides.


LUCB2918G0000LUCB2924G0000LUCB2930G0000LUCB2936G0000LUCB2942G0000LUCB2948G0000LUCB3518G0000LUCB3524G0000LUCB3530G0000LUCB3536G0000LUCB3542G0000LUCB3548G0000

sitting height, open, single shelf sitting height, open, single shelf sitting height, open, single shelf sitting height, open, single shelf sitting height, open, single shelf sitting height, open, single shelf standing height, open, single shelfstanding height, open, single shelf standing height, open, single shelf standing height, open, single shelf standing height, open, single shelf standing height, open, single shelf

65 [29]75 [34]90 [41]100 [45]105 [48]115 [52]75 [34]80 [36]110 [50]110 [50]115 [52]125 [57]

29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]

18 [457]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]42 [1067]48 [1219]18 [457]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]42 [1067]48 [1219]

217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]


W D

H

FRONT SIDE

Rev. 03.29.10

10.13

LA

B P

RO

DU

CT

S


LUCBxxyyC

STATIONARY BASE CABINETS - OPEN UNIT BASE CABINETS - SITTING HEIGHT DOUBLE DRAWER

LUCB2918G20BNLUCB2924G20BNLUCB2918G20BLLUCB2924G20BLLUCB2918C20BNLUCB2924C20BNLUCB2918C20BLLUCB2924C20BL

95 [43]105 [48]95 [43]105 [48]101 [46]111 [50]101 [46]111 [50]

29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]

18 [457]24 [610]18 [457]24 [610]18 [457]24 [610]18 [457]24 [610]

217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]



chemical resistant epoxy powder coat paint finish.• Drawers have full-extension ball bearing, plated drawer slides.• Sound deadened drawers have "double pan" construction with a bar

pull.• Built to SEFA standards.• Available with or without locks. Standard cam lock cores are not


casters and two rear swivel casters.• Stationary units are open on top, contain a removable back panel

and include leveling glides.




• Double drawer unit is only available in sitting height (29" high).



LUCBxxyyG

W D

H

FRONT SIDE

W

H

D

Rev. 03.29.10

sitting height, glides, non-lockingsitting height, glides, non-lockingsitting height, glides, lockingsitting height, glides, lockingsitting height, casters, non-lockingsitting height, casters, non-lockingsitting height, casters, lockingsitting height, casters, locking

10.14

LA

B P

RO

DU

CT

S


BASE CABINETS - SITTING HEIGHT THREE DRAWER


Non-locking, glidesNon-locking, glidesLocking, glidesLocking, glidesNon-locking, castersNon-locking, castersLocking, castersLocking, casters

95 [43]110 [50]95 [43]110 [50]101 [46]116 [52]101 [46]116 [53]

29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]

18 [457]24 [610]18 [457]24 [610]18 [457]24 [610]18 [457]24 [610]

217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]




pull.• Built to SEFA standards.• Available with or without locks. Standard cam lock core are not









LUCBxxyyC

LUCBxxyyG

W D

H

FRONT SIDE

W

H

D

Rev. 03.29.10

10.15

LA

B P

RO

DU

CT

S


BASE CABINETS - SITTING HEIGHT THREE DRAWER

Rev. 07.21.15

SUSPENDED BASE CABINETS - SITTING HEIGHT DRAWERS


surfaces and 4-Legged Table Cabinet Mounting Brackets.• Cabinets are constructed of welded 18 and 20 gauge steel with a



removable.• Units are open on top and have a solid steel back panel.







LUCB2518S30

LUCB2518S20

W

W

D

D

H

H

FRONT

FRONT

SIDE

SIDE

LUCB2518S30BNLUCB2524S30BNLUCB2518S30BLLUCB2524S30BLLUCB2518S20BNLUCB2524S20BNLUCB2518S20BLLUCB2524S20BL

sitting height, 3-drawer, non-lockingsitting height, 3-drawer, non-lockingsitting height, 3-drawer, lockingsitting height, 3-drawer, lockingsitting height, 2-drawer, non-lockingsitting height, 2-drawer, non-lockingsitting height, 2-drawer, lockingsitting height, 2-drawer, locking

81 [37]91 [41]81 [37]91 [41]81 [37]91 [41]81 [37]91 [41]

25 [635]25 [635]25 [635]25 [635]25 [635]25 [635]25 [635]25 [635]

18 [457]24 [610]18 [457]24 [610]18 [457]24 [610]18 [457]24 [610]

217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]


10.16

LA

B P

RO

DU

CT

S


4-LEGGED TABLE CABINET MOUNTING BRACKETS

Rev. 07.21.15

DESCRIPTION • 4-Legged Table Cabinet Mounting Brackets allow suspended Base

Cabinets to be mounted to a work surface on the 4-Legged Table.• 4-Legged Table, Work Surface, Cabinet and Mounting Brackets

must be ordered individually.• Mounting Brackets are used with 25" high Base Cabinets which

vary in width from 18-48 inches.• Color is Standard White.






Rev. 03.29.10LUCB4MBSW 5 [1]

23/8 [60] 2 [51] 161/2 [419]


WD

H

SIDEFRONT

10.17

LA

B P

RO

DU

CT

S


4-LEGGED TABLE CABINET MOUNTING BRACKETS

Rev. 03.29.10

BASE CABINETS - STANDING HEIGHT THREE DRAWER


non-locking, glidesnon-locking, glideslocking, glideslocking, glidesnon-locking, castersnon-locking, casterslocking, casterslocking, casters

110 [50]125 [57]110 [50]125 [57]116 [53]101 [46]116 [53]101 [46]

35 [737]35 [737]35 [737]35 [737]35 [737]35 [737]35 [737]35 [737]

18 [457]24 [610]18 [457]24 [610]18 [457]24 [610]18 [457]24 [610]

217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]



chemical resistant epoxy powder coat paint finish. • Drawers have full-extension ball bearing, plated drawer slides.• Sound deadened drawers have "double pan" construction with a bar










W D

H

FRONT SIDE

W

H

D

LUCBxxyyC

LUCBxxyyG

10.18

LA

B P

RO

DU

CT

S


BASE CABINETS - STANDING HEIGHT FOUR DRAWER

Rev. 03.29.10


non-locking, glidesnon-locking, glideslocking, glideslocking, glidesnon-locking, castersnon-locking, casterslocking, casterslocking, casters

115 [52]130 [59]115 [52]130 [59]121 [55]136 [62]121 [55]136 [62]

35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]

18 [457]24 [610]18 [457]24 [610]18 [457]24 [610]18 [457]24 [610]

217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]











• Four drawer unit is only available in sitting height (35" high).



Rev. 03.29.10

W D

H

FRONT SIDE

W

H

D

LUCBxxyyC

LUCBxxyyG

10.19

LA

B P

RO

DU

CT

S


LUCP2524SA0B2LUCP2524SA1B1LUCP2524SA3B0LUCP2924GA0B2LUCP2924GA1B1LUCP2924GA3B0LUCP3524GA0B2LUCP3524GA1B2LUCP3524GA2B1LUCP3524GA4B0

bottle drawer, suspendedbottle drawer, suspendedbottle drawer, suspendedbottle drawer, glidesbottle drawer, glidesbottle drawer, glidesbottle drawer, glidesbottle drawer, glidesbottle drawer, glidesbottle drawer, glides

107 [49]105 [47]117 [53]110 [50]108 [49]120 [54]115 [52]130 [59]128 [58]140 [64]

25 [635]25 [635]25 [635]29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]

24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]

217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]



chemical resistant epoxy powder coat paint finish.• Drawers have full-extension ball bearing, plated drawer slides.• Built to SEFA standards.• Suspended bottle drawers can be hung from the underside of

worksurfaces and 4-Legged Tables.• Drawer wrappers, binning strips and 3 drawer dividers provided with

each drawer.NOTES: • Load capacity is 50 lbs. per drawer.• The suspended component(s)

reduces the surface load capacity by an amount equal to the suspended component and its contents.



BOTTLE DRAWER CABINETS

Rev. 03.29.10 Rev. 09.22.15

W D

H

FRONT SIDE

W

H

D

LUCP3524GA4B0

LUCP2524SA1B1

10.20

LA

B P

RO

DU

CT

S

LAB PRODUCTSLAB PRODUCTSwww.symbiote.com 800.283.2434 www.symbiote.com 800.283.2434Rev. 03.29.10Rev. 03.29.10

DESCRIPTION • Sink base cabinets have welded 18 and 20 gauge steel construction

with a chemical resistant epoxy powder coat paint.• Drawers have full-extension, ball bearing, plated drawer slides.• Built to SEFA standards.• Sound deadened drawers have "double pan" construction with a bar

pull.• Doors have 5-knuckle stainless steel institutional type hinges.• Features a removable bottom pan as well as open upper back for

access to plumbing.

NOTES: • For proper layout dimensioning of

sink bases refer to the Lab Planning Guide.

• Sink Bases can be used in conjunction with UltraFrame, lab legs and support brackets; see pages 2.2, 10.25Rev. 03.29.10 Rev. 03.29.10

-10.26.• Recessed pulls available. Consult


single door, non-lockingsingle door, non-lockingsingle door, non-lockingsingle door, non-lockingdouble door, non-lockingdouble door, non-lockingdouble door, non-lockingdouble door, non-lockingdouble door, non-lockingdouble door, non-lockingsingle door, lockingsingle door, locking single door, lockingsingle door, lockingdouble door, lockingdouble door, lockingdouble door, lockingdouble door, lockingdouble door, lockingdouble door, locking

75 [34]75 [34]85 [39]85 [39]105 [48]105 [48]120 [54]125 [57]135 [61]140 [64]75 [34]75 [34]85 [39]85 [39]105 [48]105 [48]120 [54]125 [57]135 [61]140 [64]

35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]

18 [457]18 [457]24 [610]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]42 [1067]48 [1219]52 [1321]58 [1473]18 [457]18 [457]24 [610]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]42 [1067]48 [1219]52 [1321]58 [1473]

217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]217/8 [556]


W D

H

FRONT SIDE

SINK BASES

Rev. 03.29.10

LUCS3518LBNLUCS3518RBNLUCS3524LBNLUCS3524RBNLUCS3530DBNLUCS3536DBNLUCS3542DBNLUCS3548DBNLUCS3552DBNLUCS3558DBNLUCS3518LBLLUCS3518RBLLUCS3524LBLLUCS3524RBLLUCS3530DBLLUCS3536DBLLUCS3542DBLLUCS3548DBLLUCS3552DBLLUCS3558DBL

10.21

LA

B P

RO

DU

CT

S

LAB PRODUCTSLAB PRODUCTSwww.symbiote.com 800.283.2434 www.symbiote.com 800.283.2434 Rev. 03.29.10Rev. 03.29.10

BASE WALL CASES - GLASS DOORS

LUCW2424GLBNLUCW2424GRBNLUCW2430GDBNLUCW2436GDBNLUCW2448GDBNLUCW3024GLBNLUCW3024GRBNLUCW3030GDBNLUCW3036GDBNLUCW3048GDBNLUCW2424GLBLLUCW2424GRBLLUCW2430GDBLLUCW2436GDBLLUCW2448GDBLLUCW3024GLBLLUCW3024GRBLLUCW3030GDBLLUCW3036GDBLLUCW3048GDBL

left hinged, single door, non-lockingright hinged, single door, non-lockingdouble door, non-lockingdouble door, non-lockingdouble door, non-lockingleft hinged, single door, non-lockingright hinged, single door, non-lockingdouble door, non-lockingdouble door, non-lockingdouble door, non-lockingleft hinged, single door, lockingright hinged, single door, lockingdouble door, lockingdouble door, lockingdouble door, lockingleft hinged, single door, lockingright hinged, single door, lockingdouble door, lockingdouble door, lockingdouble door, locking

24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]31 [762]31 [762]31 [762]31 [762]31 [762]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]31 [762]31 [762]31 [762]31 [762]31 [762]

24 [610]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]24 [610]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]24 [610]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]24 [610]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]

13 [330]13 [330]13 [330]13 [330]13 [330]13 [330]13 [330]13 [330]13 [330]13 [330]13 [330]13 [330]13 [330]13 [330]13 [330]13 [330]13 [330]13 [330]13 [330]13 [330]


DESCRIPTION • Cabinets have welded 18 and 20 gauge steel construction with a

chemical resistant epoxy powder coat paint finish.• Single or double glass doors are available with or without locks.• A single full depth adjustable shelf is included with each 24" high

cabinet and two shelves are included with each 30" high cabinet.• Built to SEFA standards.• Sound deadened drawers have "double pan" construction with a bar

pull.• Doors have 5-knuckle stainless steel institutional type hinges.• All standard wall cases are 13" deep.• Wall cases include the necessary hardware for mounting to either

UltraFrames, Wall Strips or directly to a wall.

NOTES: • Additional shelves, 16" cabinet

depth and recessed pulls available; consult factory.


55 [25]55 [25]70 [32]80 [36]100 [45]70 [32]70 [32]85 [39]95 [43]125 [57]55 [25]55 [25]70 [32]80 [36]100 [45]70 [32]70 [32]85 [39]95 [43]125 [57]

W

H

D

FRONT SIDE

10.22

LA

B P

RO

DU

CT

S


Rev. 03.29.10

LUCW2424SLBNLUCW2424SRBNLUCW2430SDBNLUCW2436SDBNLUCW2448SDBNLUCW3024SLBNLUCW3024SRBNLUCW3030SDBNLUCW3036SDBNLUCW3048SDBNLUCW2424SLBLLUCW2424SRBLLUCW2430SDBLLUCW2436SDBLLUCW2448SDBLLUCW3024SLBLLUCW3024SRBLLUCW3030SDBLLUCW3036SDBLLUCW3048SDBL

left hinged, single door, non-lockingright hinged, single door, non-lockingdouble door, non-locking double door, non-lockingdouble door, non-lockingleft hinged, single door, non-lockingright hinged, single door, non-lockingdouble door, non-lockingdouble door, non-lockingdouble door, non-lockingleft hinged, single door, lockingright hinged, single door, lockingdouble door, lockingdouble door, lockingdouble door, lockingleft hinged, single door, lockingright hinged, single door, lockingdouble door, lockingdouble door, lockingdouble door, locking

55 [25]55 [25]70 [32]80 [36]100 [45]70 [32]70 [32]85 [39]95 [43]125 [57]55 [25]55 [25]70 [32]80 [36]100 [45]70 [32]70 [32]85 [39]95 [43]125 [57]

24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]31 [762]31 [762]31 [762]31 [762]31 [762]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]31 [762]31 [762]31 [762]31 [762]31 [762]

24 [610]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]24 [610]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]24 [610]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]24 [610]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]

13 [330]13 [330]13 [330]13 [330]13 [330]13 [330]13 [330]13 [330]13 [330]13 [330]13 [330]13 [330]13 [330]13 [330]13 [330]13 [330]13 [330]13 [330]13 [330]13 [330]



chemical resistant epoxy powder coat paint finish.• Single or double glass doors are available with or without locks.• A single full depth adjustable shelf is included with each 24" high

cabinet and two shelves are included with each 30" high cabinet.• Built to SEFA standards.• Sound deadened drawers have "double pan" construction with a bar

pull.• Doors have 5-knuckle stainless steel institutional type hinges.• All standard wall cases are 13" deep.• Wall cases include the necessary hardware for mounting to either

UltraFrames, Wall Strips or directly to a wall.

NOTES: • Additional shelves, 16" cabinet

depth and recessed pulls available; consult factory.


W

H

D

WALL CASES - SOLID DOORS

FRONT SIDE

Rev. 03.29.10

10.23

LA

B P

RO

DU

CT

S

LAB PRODUCTSLAB PRODUCTSwww.symbiote.com 800.283.2434 www.symbiote.com 800.283.2434 Rev. 03.29.10

Rev. 03.29.10

LUCF1636SDBNLUCF1636GDBNLUCF1648SDBNLUCF1648GDBNLUCF1636SDBLLUCF1636GDBLLUCF1648SDBLLUCF1648GDBL

double solid door, non-lockingdouble glass door, non-lockingdouble solid door, non-lockingdouble glass door, non-lockingdouble solid door, lockingdouble glass door, lockingdouble solid door, lockingdouble glass door, locking

300 [136]305 [138]380 [172]390 [177]300 [136]305 [138]380 [172]390 [177]

84 [2134]84 [2134]84 [2134]84 [2134]84 [2134]84 [2134]84 [2134]84 [2134]

36 [914]36 [914]48 [1219]48 [1219]36 [914]36 [914]48 [1219]48 [1219]

16 [406]16 [406]16 [406]16 [406]16 [406]16 [406]16 [406]16 [406]



chemical resistant epoxy powder coat paint finish.• Solid or glass double doors are available with or without locks.• Five full depth adjustable shelf is included with each floor case.• Built to SEFA standards.• Sound deadened drawers have "double pan" construction with a bar

pull.• Doors have 5-knuckle stainless steel institutional type hinges.• All standard floor cases are 16" deep.

NOTES: • Floor cases are free-standing and

not intended to attach to a frame.• Floor cases must be secured to

a wall or otherwise supported vertically.

• Leveling glides included for stability adjustment.

• Standard depth is 16", consult factory for pricing on 21¼" deep floor cases.


FLOOR CASES

Rev. 03.29.10

W

H

D

FRONT SIDELUCFxxyyG LUCFxxyyS

10.24

LA

B P

RO

DU

CT

S


WALL STRIPS

Rev. 03.29.10

Rev. 10.12.10

DESCRIPTION • The wall strip attaches with wall fasteners to a structural wall to

support hanging components. Two wall strips are required to hang a component.

• The 60" wall strip requires 8 fasteners; the 72" wall strip requires 9 fasteners; and the 84" wall strip requires 11 fasteners.

• The wall strip is sold individually, not in pairs.

NOTES: • Wall fasteners not included; consult

factory.


W

H

WS60BKWS72BKWS84BK

3 [1] 3 [1] 3 [1]

60 [1524]72 [1829]84 [2134]

1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]

3/4 [20]3/4 [20]3/4 [20]


D

FRONT

TOP

Rev. 10.20.10

10.25

LA

B P

RO

DU

CT

S


LUSCL18LUSCR18LUSCL24LUSCR24

left right left right

4 [2] 4 [2] 5 [2] 5 [2]

81/2 [216]81/2 [216]

101/2 [267]101/2 [267]

11/4 [32]11/4 [32]11/4 [32]11/4 [32]

181/4 [464]181/4 [464]241/4 [616]241/4 [616]


DESCRIPTION • Lab Cantilever Brackets provide manual height adjustable support

for 24" and 30" deep work surfaces mounted to UltraFrames supported by Lab Legs.

• Cantilevers also provide mid support for surfaces wider than 60".

NOTES: • Use 24" cantilevers with 24" and

30" deep surfaces. 36" deep surfaces should be supported with Lab Legs and Adjacent Brackets; see pages 10.24-10.27.

• 72" and 96" wide frame-mounted surfaces must be supported in the center by Lab Cantilever Brackets. Specify one 18" cantilever per 24" and 30" deep surface and one 24" cantilever per 36" deep surface.

• Cantilever brackets cannot be used with Lab Reinforcement Bars.


W

H

D

CANTILEVER BRACKETS

SIDE

TOP

Rev. 10.20.10

10.26

LA

B P

RO

DU

CT

S


LUSB

Rev. 09.23.10

H

DESCRIPTION • Brackets provide manual height adjustable support for Ultra or Work

Surfaces mounted to C Leg Supports.• Height range is 261/8" to 361/8" for CLM and 311/8" to 411/8" for CLT.• Lab Height B Supports allow for surface height alignment with Lab

Leg mounted surfaces and provide clearance for Base Cabinets at the nominal 29" and 35" bracket heights.

• Extended brackets are for use with 36" deep surfaces, while the185/8" deep brackets are for use with 24" and 30" deep surfaces.


121/2 [317] 121/2 [317] 121/2 [317] 121/2 [317]

leftrightleft, extended right, extended

21/4 [57]21/4 [57]21/4 [57]21/4 [57]

185/8 [451]185/8 [451]185/8 [451]185/8 [451]

LUSBL10GLLUSBR10GLLUSBEL10GLLUSBER10GL

121/2 [6]121/2 [6]161/2 [8]161/2 [8]

FRONT SIDE SIDE

LUSBE

D


WD

LUSB LUSBE

NOTES: • 72" and 96" frame-mounted surfaces

must be supported in the center by Lab Cantilever Brackets. Specify one 18" cantilever per 24" and 30" deep surface and one 24" cantilever per 36" deep surface.

LAB HEIGHT B SUPPORTS

Rev. 10.20.10

10.27

LA

B P

RO

DU

CT

S


Rev. 07.07.10Rev. 10.20.10

LULL2924CLULL2924GLULL2930CLULL2930GLULL2936CLULL2936GLULL3524CLULL3524GLULL3530CLULL3530GLULL3536CLULL3536G

casterglidecasterglidecasterglidecasterglidecasterglidecasterglide

13 [6]13 [6]14 [6]14 [6]15 [7]15 [7]14 [6]14 [6]15 [7]15 [7]16 [7]16 [7]

29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]29 [737]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]

11/2 [38]11/2 [38]11/2 [38]11/2 [38]11/2 [38]11/2 [38]11/2 [38]11/2 [38]11/2 [38]11/2 [38]11/2 [38]11/2 [38]

233/4 [603]233/4 [603]293/4 [756]293/4 [756]353/4 [908]353/4 [908]233/4 [603]233/4 [603]293/4 [756]293/4 [756]353/4 [908]353/4 [908]


DESCRIPTION • Lab Legs provide standing support for UltraFrames.• Legs bolt to connection points on both the front and back sides of

UltraFrames and Connector Posts (80" high max).• Legs are each equipped with a leveling glide. Lab Legs with Casters

also include a 4" diameter polypropylene caster with totalock brake (simultaneously locks swivel and wheel) and can only be attached to UltraFrames with Casters. Lab legs with Glides bolt to UltraFrames with Glides or Connector Posts.

• Lab Legs cannot be used to support 96" high UltraFrames.• Surfaces can be mounted directly to the top of Lab Legs mounted

inboard of the frame. Outboard mounted Lab Legs require Adjacent Brackets to support the surface.

NOTES: • The nominal Lab Leg depth must

match the nominal surface depth.• Adjacent Brackets sold seperately;

see page 10.27.


W

H

D

W

H

D

FRONT SIDE

LULLxxyyC LULLxxyyG

LAB LEGS

10.28

LA

B P

RO

DU

CT

S


DESCRIPTION • Adjacent Brackets provide fixed height support for work surfaces

mounted to Lab Legs outboard of the UltraFrame.• Brackets can be used in conjunction with Lab Leg Panels and Lab

Reinforcement Bars.

NOTES: • Order nominal bracket depth to

match surface depth.


ADJACENT BRACKETS

W

H

D

LUSA24LUSA30LUSA36

2 [1] 3 [1] 3 [1]

2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]

2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]

211/2 [546]271/2 [699]331/2 [851]


FRONT SIDE

Rev. 10.20.10Rev. 10.20.10

10.29

LA

B P

RO

DU

CT

S

LAB PRODUCTSLAB PRODUCTSwww.symbiote.com 800.283.2434 www.symbiote.com 800.283.2434 Rev. 10.20.10

ADJACENT BRACKETS

Rev. 10.20.10

Rev. 03.29.10Rev. 03.29.10

Rev. 07.07.10

LUSR48BK LUSR60BKLUSR72BK

surface reinforcement bar, pairsurface reinforcement bar, pairsurface reinforcement bar, pair

15 [7] 18 [8] 21 [9]

2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]

431/2 -491/2 [1105-1257]551/2 -611/2 [1410-1562]671/2 -731/2 [1715-1867]

2 [51]2 [51]2 [51]


DESCRIPTION • Lab Reinforcement Bars provide horizontal support under work

surfaces for increased rigidity. • Bars are sold in pairs and mount at the front and 20" behind the

front of Lab Legs.• Bars adjust over a 6" range to accomodate inboard and outboard

Lab Legs and Adjacent Bracket clearance.• Finish is Black.

NOTES: • Lab Reinforcement Bars cannot be

used with Lab Cantilever Brackets.

TO ORDER, SPECIFY:

1) Product Number

W

H

D

SURFACE REINFORCEMENT BARS

FRONT

TOP

Rev. 10.20.10

10.30

LA

B P

RO

DU

CT

S


Rev. 07.07.10

Rev. 03.29.10Rev. 03.29.10

LUTP2424BKLUTP2430BKLUTP2436BKLUTP2448BKLUTP2460BKLUTP2472BKLUTP2496BKLUTP24120BKLUTP3024BKLUTP3030BKLUTP3036BKLUTP3048BKLUTP3060BKLUTP3072BKLUTP3096BKLUTP30120BKLUTP3624BKLUTP3630BKLUTP3636BKLUTP3648BKLUTP3660BKLUTP3672BKLUTP3696BKLUTP36120BK

29 [13.1]36 [16.3]43 [19.6]58 [26.1]72 [13.1]86 [13.1]115 [13.1]144 [13.1]36 [16.3]45 [20.4]54 [24.5]72 [32.7]90 [40.8]108 [49]144 [65.3]180 [81.6]43 [19.6]54 [24.5]65 [29.4]86 [39.2]108 [49]130 [58.8]173 [78.4]216 [98]

1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]

24 [610]30 [762]36 [614]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]120 [3048]24 [610]30 [762]36 [614]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]120 [3048]24 [610]30 [762]36 [614]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]96 [2438]120 [3048]

24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]30 [762]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]36 [914]

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS

DESCRIPTION • 1" high solid phenolic resin tops are full width and depth and can be

mounted to Base Cabinets and/or surface supports.• Tops have smooth 1/8" radius corners and edges.• Surfaces are not predrilled, but do include a drip groove inset from

the front edge of the surface.• Phenolic resin material is specifically manufactured for highly

corrosive environments and provides exceptional chemical and wear resistance. Contact the factory for detailed chemical resistance testing data.

• Load capacity 300 lbs. evenly distributed when supported every five feet.

• Finish is Black.

NOTES: • Mounting hardware is not included;

recommended attaching method is silicone adhesive.

TO ORDER, SPECIFY:

1) Product Number

W

PHENOLIC LAB TOPS

Product Height Width Depth WeightNumber in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] lb. [kg]

D

H

Rev. 03.20.12Rev. 03.20.12

10.31

LA

B P

RO

DU

CT

S


LULP2924CLLULP2924CRLULP2924GLLULP2924GRLULP2930CLLULP2930CRLULP2930GLLULP2930GRLULP2936CLLULP2936CRLULP2936GLLULP2936GRLULP3524CLLULP3524CRLULP3524GLLULP3524GRLULP3530CLLULP3530CRLULP3530GLLULP3530GRLULP3536CLLULP3536CRLULP3536GLLULP3536GR

caster, leftcaster, rightglide, leftglide, rightcaster, leftcaster, rightglide, leftglide, rightcaster, leftcaster, rightglide, leftglide, rightcaster, leftcaster, rightglide, leftglide, rightcaster, leftcaster, rightglide, leftglide, rightcaster, leftcaster, rightglide, leftglide, right

15 [7]15 [7]15 [7]15 [7]16 [7]16 [7]16 [7]16 [7]17 [8]17 [8]17 [8]17 [8]16 [7]16 [7]16 [7]16 [7]17 [8]17 [8]17 [8]17 [8]18 [8]18 [8]18 [8]18 [8]

233/4 [603]233/4 [603]28 [711]28 [711]233/4 [603]233/4 [603]28 [711]28 [711]233/4 [603]233/4 [603]28 [711]28 [711]293/4 [756]293/4 [756]34 [864]34 [864]293/4 [756]293/4 [756]34 [864]34 [864]293/4 [756]293/4 [756]34 [864]34 [864]

11/2 [38]11/2 [38]11/2 [38]11/2 [38]11/2 [38]11/2 [38]11/2 [38]11/2 [38]11/2 [38]11/2 [38]11/2 [38]11/2 [38]11/2 [38]11/2 [38]11/2 [38]11/2 [38]11/2 [38]11/2 [38]11/2 [38]11/2 [38]11/2 [38]11/2 [38]11/2 [38]11/2 [38]

233/4 [603]233/4 [603]233/4 [603]233/4 [603]293/4 [756]293/4 [756]293/4 [756]293/4 [756]353/4 [908]353/4 [908]353/4 [908]353/4 [908]233/4 [603]233/4 [603]233/4 [603]233/4 [603]293/4 [756]293/4 [756]293/4 [756]293/4 [756]353/4 [908]353/4 [908]353/4 [908]353/4 [908]


Rev. 07.07.10Rev. 07.07.10

Rev. 03.20.12

DESCRIPTION • Metal Lab Leg Panels finish the side faces of Lab Leg.• Lab Leg Panels attach through holes in the Lab Legs with PEM

studs and connector nuts.• Lab Leg Panels for Lab Legs with Casters have clearance at the

bottom for caster swivel radius.• Panels can be used in conjunction with Adjacent Brackets and

Reinforcement Bars. NOTES: • Lab Leg Panels must be ordered

with the same nominal height, depth and glide/caster style as the Lab Leg it will mount on.


W

W

H

H

D

D

FRONT

FRONT

SIDE

SIDE

LULPxxyyCR LULPxxyyGR

GLIDE

CASTER

LAB LEG PANELS

10.32

LA

B P

RO

DU

CT

S


LAB CABINET FILLERS

NOTES: • Hardware is not provided to mount

filler slip joint to wall.

Rev. 03.29.10Rev. 03.29.10

LUFB35C01LUFB35C02LUFB35C04LUFB35D24LUFB35D30LUFB35D36

inside cornerinside cornerinside cornerrear, 24" deep surfacerear, 30" deep surfacerear, 36" deep surface

7 [3] 8 [4] 9 [4] 3 [1] 4 [2] 7 [3]

35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]

1 [25]2 [51]4 [102]1 [25]7 [177]11 [299]

1 [25]2 [51]4 [102]1 [25]7 [178]13 [330]



W

H

DTOP

FRONT

D

H

W

FRONT

TOP

LUFB35C

DESCRIPTION Inside Corner Base Cabinet Fillers• Corner Fillers are used where two base cabinets meet at a ninety

degree angle.• Filler kit includes an angled filler panel, which provides either 1", 2"

or 4" clearance between cabinet fronts, mounting clips to attach the filler to the cabinets, and a toekick to conceal cabinet spacing.

Rear Base Cabinet Fillers• Rear Fillers are used in the space between the rear of the cabinet

and the wall.• Fillers provide a clean finished look when surfaces are deeper than

the base cabinets and conceal any utilities that are routed behind cabinets.

• Filler kit includes a filler panel and a slip joint, which mounts to the wall.

Rev. 10.20.10

LUFB35D

10.33

LA

B P

RO

DU

CT

S

LAB PRODUCTSLAB PRODUCTSwww.symbiote.com 800.283.2434 www.symbiote.com 800.283.2434Rev. 10.20.10 Rev. 10.20.10

LAB CABINET FILLERS

Rev. 03.29.10Rev. 03.29.10

LUFB35W08LUFB35W14LUFF84W02LUFF84W08

base cabinetbase cabinetfloor casefloor case

10 [5] 12 [5.5] 22 [10] 25 [11]

35 [889]35 [889]84 [2134]84 [2134]

8 [203]14 [356]2 [51]8 [203]

1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]


NOTES: • Hardware is not provided to mount

filler slip joint to wall.


LUFB35W LUFF84W

H

W

D

D

H

W

FRONT SIDE

FRONT SIDE

DESCRIPTION • Front Fillers are used when there is excess space between the

side of the Base Cabinet or Floor Case and a wall. • Filler kit includes a filler panel, mounting clips to attach the filler to

the cabinet, a skip joint, which mounts to the wall and a toekick to conceal cabinet spacing.

• Filler panel and toekick can be cut to width in the field to accommodate custom spacing.

Rev. 10.20.10

10.34

LA

B P

RO

DU

CT

S


LAB LEG FILLERS

Rev. 02.02.11

H

W DFRONT SIDE

Rev. 03.29.10Rev. 03.29.10

LULF35E01LULF35E02LULF35E03

full gaphalf gaphalf gap

3 [1] 31/2 [1.5] 4 [2]

35 [889]35 [889]35 [889]

1 [25]21/2 [64]31/2 [90]

3 [76]3 [76]3 [76]



DESCRIPTION • Lab Leg Fillers are used to fill the gap between Lab Legs and

adjacent Base Cabinets in an end of run configuration using a Three-way Connector.

• Fillers mount directly to Lab Legs without the need to add holes or hardware to either the leg or adjacent cabinet.

NOTES • Hardware to attach Lab Leg Filler

is included with the Lab Leg Panel; see page 10.30. If Lab Leg Panels will not be used in conjunction with Lab Leg Fillers, please consult factory for Lab Leg Filler hardware ordering information.

• Order two half gap style fillers if the difference between the total cabinet width and frame run is 9½" or greater. Order a single full gap filler if the cabinet/frame run difference is 5½".

• Two half gap style fillers are shown in the above image.

Rev. 10.20.10Rev. 10.20.10

CO

MP

UT

ER

SUP

PO

RT

11.1COMPUTER SUPPORTCOMPUTER SUPPORTwww.symbiote.com 800.283.2434 www.symbiote.com 800.283.243411

COMPUTER SUPPORT

Keyboard and Mouse Tray - Surface Mount

CPU Holder

Tower Dollies

Accessory Mounting Brackets

Flat Screen/Accessory Arms - Surface Bolt Mount

Flat Screen/Accessory Arms - End/Center/Saddle Mount

Flat Screen/Accessory Arms - Slatwall Mount

Slatwall Rail

Flat Screen Keyboard Tray

11.211.311.411.511.611.711.811.811.9

SECTION 11

CO

MP

UT

ER

SU

PP

OR

T

11.2 COMPUTER SUPPORTCOMPUTER SUPPORTwww.symbiote.com 800.283.2434 www.symbiote.com 800.283.2434Rev. 03.03.10

TOPW

D

H

SIDE


DESCRIPTION • Keyboard Trays provide storage for keyboards beneath Ultra Surfaces.• 105/8" deep by 201/8" wide keyboard platform includes a black non-skid pad and a removable foam wrist rest that leaves 8" of useable tray depth when in place. • Trays feature 41/4" of spring assisted vertical travel and have a tilt adjustment range of 0 to -10°.• Trays swivel 360° and feature sliding tracks that provide a 16" travel range allowing trays to retract under surfaces. In the forward most position, the front of the Keyboard Tray extends 14" from the front of the surface.• Keyboard mechanisms adjust in height with a simple one-handed motion without the use of locks, levers or knobs. Unique angle adjustment levers allow users to simply adjust the angle by sliding the lever from left to right.• A 9" diameter round Mouse Tray is included with each Keyboard Tray. Mouse Trays can be mounted on the left or right side of Keyboard Trays and swivel 360° to hide under the trays when not used with a mouse.• Mouse Trays each include a black non-skid pad and moveable stopper to protect the mouse from falling off the tray.• Load capacity 25 lbs.• Finish is Black.

KTAMBK 15 [7]43/4 [121] 291/2 [749] 213/4 [552]


NOTES: • Cannot be mounted on a 24" or 30" surface when being used with a Table, WorkTable, or ErgoStat.

Rev. 03.20.12

KEYBOARD AND MOUSE TRAYS - SURFACE MOUNT

CO

MP

UT

ER

SUP

PO

RT


D

W

DESCRIPTION • CPU Holder provides vertical storage of central processing units below work surfaces.• Holder features a sliding track which allows the unit to retract 9" from the front of the track and extend 4" from the front of the track.• Holder can be mounted without the sliding track directly to a work surface for use with tables with stretchers.• Fits CPUs 3" to 9" wide and 13.50" to 19.25" tall.• Units swivel 360° for easy access.• Load capacity 75 lbs.• Finish is Black.

Rev. 01.29.09

CPU HOLDER


CPUBBK 5 [2]18-233/4 [456-603] 61/2-121/2 [165-317] 16 [406]

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS Product Height Range Width Range Depth WeightNumber in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] lb. [kg]

Rev. 03.23.15

H

CO

MP

UT

ER

SU

PP

OR

T

11.4 COMPUTER SUPPORTCOMPUTER SUPPORTwww.symbiote.com 800.283.2434 www.symbiote.com 800.283.2434

DESCRIPTION • Tower Dollies provide mobile storage for CPUs in workstations.• Assemblies each include a 11/4" high laminated base with matching vinyl Edge-band, 3" twin wheel braking casters and handles on the front face (or nothing).• Load capacity 250 lbs. evenly distributed.

TO ORDER, SPECIFY:1) Product Number2) Laminate Standard Standard Laminates: BK Black GF Grey Fleck GL Grey Light NW Neutral White SA Sand SF Sand Fleck WF White Fleck

NOTES • Units are sized to fit between two C Leg Supports on a workstation.

Rev. 01.29.09

TOWER DOLLIES

TDOL2420TDOL2426TDOL2432TDOL2444TDOL2456TDOL2468

25 [11]27 [12]32 [15]39 [18]48 [22]57 [26]

43/4 [121]43/4 [121]43/4 [121]43/4 [121]43/4 [121]43/4 [121]

18 [457]24 [610]30 [762]42 [1067]54 [1372]66 [1676]

24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]


Rev. 01.29.09

W

D

H

Top

Front

TDOL(cat)

W

D

H

Top

Front

TDOL(cat)

TOP

W

D

H

FRONT

CO

MP

UT

ER

SUP

PO

RT


DESCRIPTION • Accessory Mounting Brackets suspend a CPUB and KTAM from the underside of a 4-Legged Table.• Brackets mount to the bottom of the surface with screws provided in the computer accessory kit. • Load capacity 75 lbs. • Finish is black.


NOTES • Works with KTAM on 30" and 36" deep tables (not 24" depth).• Compatible with CPUBBK on all table depths.

ACCESSORY MOUNTING BRACKETS

ACMBBK 2 [1]23/8 [60] 81/2 [215] 11/2 [40]


Rev. 10.10.11 Rev. 08.19.14

H

D

TOP

FRONT

W

CO

MP

UT

ER

SU

PP

OR

T

11.6 COMPUTER SUPPORTCOMPUTER SUPPORTwww.symbiote.com 800.283.2434 www.symbiote.com 800.283.2434Rev. 10.10.11Rev. 01.29.14

DESCRIPTION Manual Flat Screen/Accessory Arms• Arms include both 75mm and 100mm VESA mounting brackets and support monitors/accessories weighing up to 20 lbs.• 360º rotation for portrait or landscape viewing.• Arms feature built-in cable management.• Bolt Mount (FSB1) bolts through a 1/2" to 3" diameter hole in surfaces up to 11/2" thick.• Surface Mount (FSS1) clamps to the edge of surfaces ranging from 1/2" to 23/4" thick.• Finish is Black.

Spring Adjustable Flat Screen Arm• Arms come standard with both 75mm and 100mm VESA mounting brackets and support monitors/accessories weighing up to 20 lbs.• 360º rotation for portrait or landscape viewing.• Arm clamps to surfaces ranging from 1/2" to 23/4" thick.• Spring adjustable arm provides a height adjustment range of 101/2".• Finish is Black.

Vertical Adjustment Mechanism• The front vertical adjustment mechanism (FSVAMBK) can be added to any arm to provide 9" of vertical adjustment without manual repositioning on post for flat screen monitors weighing up to 20 lbs.• Finish is Silver with Black trim.

NOTES • Additional multiple monitor combinations available upon request; consult factory for ordering information.


FSS1SMBKFSS1DMBKFSB1SMBKFSB1DMBKFSVAMBKFSS1DPBK

manual adj., surface mount, 1 monitor, single armmanual adj., surface mount, 1 monitor, double armmanual adj., bolt mount, 1 monitor, single armmanual adj., bolt mount, 1 monitor, double armflat screen vertical adjustment mechanismspring adjustable, 1 monitor, double arm

12 [5]13 [6]12 [5]13 [6] 4 [2]14 [6]

133/4

133/4

133/4

133/4

133/4

133/4 - 221/2"

61/2" - 141/2"81/2" - 20"61/2" - 141/2"81/2" - 20"15/8"26"

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS Product Height Depth WeightNumber Description in. [mm] in. [mm] lb. [kg]

FSS1DMBK FSB1DMBK FSS1DPBK FSVAMBK

FLAT SCREEN/ACCESSORY ARMS - SURFACE/BOLT MOUNT

CO

MP

UT

ER

SUP

PO

RT


FLAT SCREEN/ACCESSORY ARMS - END/CENTER/SADDLE MOUNT

FSE1SMBKFSE1DMBKFSC1SMBKFSC1DMBKFSU1SMBKFSU1DMBKFSA1SMBKFSA1DMBK

end, 1 monitor, single armend, 1 monitor, double armcenter, 1 monitor, single armcenter, 1 monitor, double armsaddle, 1 monitor, single armsaddle, 1 monitor, double armadd-on arm, 1 monitor, single armadd-on arm, 1 monitor, double arm

12 [5]13 [6]12 [5]13 [6]12 [5]13 [6]10 [5]11 [5]

73/4 [197]73/4 [197]51/4 [133]71/4 [184]51/4 [133]71/4 [184]51/4 [133]71/4 [184]

111/2 [292]191/4 [489]111/2 [292]191/4 [489]111/2 [292]191/4 [489]111/2 [292]191/4 [489]


Rev. 03.03.10 Rev. 01.17.14

NOTES • Additional multiple monitor combinations available upon request; consult factory for ordering information.• An FSVAMBK can be added to any arm to provide 9" of vertical adjustment without manual repositioning of the clip-mounted bases; see page 11.6.• The FSU1 will not attach to Riser Spines, but can be mounted on UltraFrame Spines.• End Covers cannot be used on the end of a frame when an FSE1 is attached.

DESCRIPTION • Arms come standard with both 75mm and 100mm VESA mounting brackets and support monitors/accessories weighing up to 20 lbs.• 360º bracket rotation for portrait or landscape viewing.• Arms feature built-in cable management.• Center Mount style (FSC1) attaches at a frame joint and adjusts vertically in 1" increments.• End Mount style (FSE1) attaches to the end of a frame and adjusts in 6" increments.• Saddle Mount style (FSU1) straddles the vertical tube of an UltraFrame, Riser Frame or Connector Post and adjusts in 1" increments. The saddle bracket allows flat screen/accessory mounting on the front, inside or back of the frame.• Add-on Arms (FSA1xM) attach to the front, inside or back mounting positions on an FSU1. Up to two sets of Add-on arms can be attached to the Saddle Mount bracket for a total capacity of 3 arms on an FSU1, one in each position.• Finish is Black.

TO ORDER, SPECIFY:

FSE1SMBK FSC1SMBK FSU1SMBK FSA1SMBK

FLAT SCREEN/ACCESSORY ARMS - SURFACE/BOLT MOUNT

CO

MP

UT

ER

SU

PP

OR

T

11.8 COMPUTER SUPPORTCOMPUTER SUPPORTwww.symbiote.com 800.283.2434 www.symbiote.com 800.283.2434

Rev. 01.29.09

NOTES • For mounting on UltraFrame System, order Slatwall Rail to fit appropriate frame size; see below.• An FSVAMBK can be added to any arm to provide 9" of vertical adjustment without manual repositioning of the clip- mounted bases; see page 11.6.

DESCRIPTION • Arms come standard with both 75mm and 100mm VESA mounting brackets and support monitors/accessories weighing up to 20 lbs.• 360˚ bracket rotation for portrait or landscape viewing.• Arms feature built-in cable management.• Finish is Black.


FSW1SMBKFSW1DMBK

slatwall, 1 monitor, single armslatwall, 1 monitor, double arm

8 [4]10 [5]

41/4 [108]61/4 [159]

111/2 [292]191/4 [489]


SLATWALL RAIL

DESCRIPTION • Provides mounting of slatwall-mounted arms and industry standard slatwall components. Allows for horizontal adjustment.• 3" center-to-center mounting.• Two mounting locations offering 3" of vertical adjustment on rail.• Horizontal rails allow for mounting of standard hang-on style plastic parts bins.


*Paint upcharge applies

SRU24SRU30SRU36SRU48SRU60

10 [5]11 [5]13 [6]14 [6]18 [8]

51/2 [140]51/2 [140]51/2 [140]51/2 [140]51/2 [140]

1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]1 [25]

24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]


Rev. 01.17.14

FLAT SCREEN/ACCESSORY ARMS - SLATWALL MOUNT

CO

MP

UT

ER

SUP

PO

RT


Rev. 01.29.09

Rev. 02.24.14

DESCRIPTION • Flat Screen Keyboard Tray saves valuable space on worksurface.• Mounts to all Symbiote Flat Screen Accessory Arms.• Vertical adjustment of 3" provides ample space for most flat screen monitors. Maximum screen height (not diagonal screen size) of 18" assuming centered VESA pattern on monitor.• Keyboard Tray is 105/8" deep by 201/8" wide, and includes a black non-skid pad and removable foam wrist rest.• A 9" diameter round Mouse Tray is included with each Keyboard Tray. Mouse Trays can be mounted on the left or right side of Keyboard Trays and swivel 360º to hide under the trays when not used with a mouse.• Mouse Trays each include a black non-skid pad and moveable stopper to protect the mouse from falling off the tray.• Finish is Black.


W

D

H

FSKTBK 61/2 [3]143/4 [375]201/8 [511]125/8 [320]


SLATWALL RAIL

FLAT SCREEN/ACCESSORY ARMS - SLATWALL MOUNT FLAT SCREEN KEYBOARD TRAY



2015

12.1

MA

TE

RIA

L HA

ND

LING

MATERIAL HANDLINGMATERIAL HANDLINGwww.symbiote.com 800.283.2434 www.symbiote.com 800.283.2434

MATERIAL HANDLINGSECTION 12

12Bin and Bin Rails - Frame & Arm Mount

Dispensing Rails

Subcontainers & Subdividers

Totes

Tote Bearers and Rails

Tote Holders

Mobile Tote Frames

Mobile Carts

Mobile Cart Handles & End Covers

Mobile Cart Bases

Spool Holders & Spindles

Holders

Overhead Tool Travelers

12.212.312.412.512.612.712.812.9

12.1012.1112.1212.1312.14

12.2

MA

TE

RIA

L H

AN

DLI

NG


DESCRIPTION Bin Rails, Frame Mount• Rails provide hanging support for generic parts bins.• Rails mount to frames and adjust vertically in 1" increments.• Load capacity 40 lbs. evenly distributed.

Bin Rail, Pivoting Arm Mount• Rails provide articulating support for up to 3 rows of generic parts bins.• Rails attach to Flat Screen / Accessory Arms.• Load capacity 12 lbs. evenly distributed.

Bin• Bins provide storage and organization of small items.• Made from a heavy-duty industrial grade polymer, Bins hang from Bin

Rails or stack together.• Load capacity is 30 lbs. • Sold in packages of 5; available in blue (BL) or clear (CL).



NOTES: • Dissipative Bin Rails each include an ESD Cable Kit Assembly for grounding.• Flat Screen/Accessory Arms sold separately; see pages 11.6-11.8.

Rev. 07.29.14

BR326

W=5.5H=5.0D=10.875

BIN AND BIN RAILS - FRAME & ARM MOUNT

BR24BR30BR36BR48BR60BR72BR326AB30230BLAB30230CL

frame mountframe mountframe mountframe mountframe mountframe mountarm mountbinbin

5 [2]6 [3]8 [4]9 [4]11 [5]14 [6]8 [4]1/2 [.2]1/2 [.2]

51/4 [133]51/4 [133]51/4 [133]51/4 [133]51/4 [133]51/4 [133]12 [305]5 [128]5 [128]

24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]26 [660]51/2 [140]51/2 [140]

3/4 [19]3/4 [19]3/4 [19]3/4 [19]3/4 [19]3/4 [19]1/2 [13]107/8 [277]107/8 [277]


BR24

AB30230

SIDE

SIDE

FRONT

FRONT

FRAME MOUNT

PIVOTW

W

W

D

D

D

H

H

H

12.3

MA

TE

RIA

L HA

ND

LING


DESCRIPTION • Dispensing Rails provide hanging support for Symbiote

Subcontainers. • Subcontainers hang at a 20° slope when mounted on Dispensing

Rails. • A-size Subcontainers hang on A-size Dispensing Rails and B size

Subcontainers hang on B-size rails.• Dissipative Dispensing Rails each include an ESD Cable Kit

Assembly for grounding.• Load capacity 50 lbs. evenly distributed.

NOTES: • Subcontainers sold separately; see page 12.4.• Description below denotes quantity of Subcontainers possible per Dispensing Rail.



Rev. 03.03.10

DISPENSING RAILS

DRA24DRA30DRA36DRA48DRA60DRB24DRB30DRB36DRB48DRB60

A-size, 5 subcontainersA-size, 6 subcontainersA-size, 7 subcontainersA-size, 10 subcontainersA-size, 12 subcontainersB-size, 5 subcontainersB-size, 6 subcontainersB-size, 7 subcontainersB-size, 10 subcontainersB-size, 12 subcontainers

5 [2]6 [3]8 [4]10 [5]13 [6]6 [3]8 [4]9 [4]12 [14]15 [7]

31/4 [83]31/4 [83]31/4 [83]31/4 [83]31/4 [83]6 [152]6 [152]6 [152]6 [152]6 [152]

24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524]

11/4 [32]11/4 [32]11/4 [32]11/4 [32]11/4 [32]21/4 [57]21/4 [57]21/4 [57]21/4 [57]21/4 [57]


Front Side

W

H

D

DRB

DRA & DRB(cat)

DRADRA

DRBFront Side

W

H

D

DRB

DRA & DRB(cat)

DRA

W D

H

FRONT SIDE

12.4

MA

TE

RIA

L H

AN

DLI

NG

MATERIAL HANDLINGMATERIAL HANDLINGwww.symbiote.com 800.283.2434 www.symbiote.com 800.283.2434Rev. 01.29.09

SUBCONTAINERS & SUBDIVIDERS

DESCRIPTION Subcontainers• Subcontainers provide storage and organization of small items.• Subcontainers hang from Dispensing Rails at a 20° slope or lay flat

in Totes and Plan Drawers for organization.• A-size Subcontainers are used with A-size Dispensing Rails,

A-sizeTotes and Plan Drawers. • B-size Subcontainers are used with B size Dispensing Rails and

B-size Totes.• Sold individually.• Plastic finish is Grey.

Subdividers• Subdividers divide Subcontainers laterally.• A-size Subdividers are used with A-size Subcontainers and B-size

Subdividers are used with B-size Subcontainers.• Sold in 10 unit packs.• Plastic finish is Grey.


Front

Subcontainer Subdivider

SA,SB & SBD(cat)

SideFront

H H

W DW

SB1

SA1SA2SA3

SB3

SAD

SBD

Side

D

SA3 SA2 SA1

SB1

SBD

SB3

SAD

Front

Subcontainer Subdivider

SA,SB & SBD(cat)

SideFront

H H

W DW

SB1

SA1SA2SA3

SB3

SAD

SBD

Side

DW WD D

H H

FRONTFRONT

SUBCONTAINER SUBDIVIDER

SIDESIDE

SA1GYSA2GYSA3GYSB1GYSB3GYSADGYSBDGY

subcontainer Asubcontainer Asubcontainer Asubcontainer Bsubcontainer Bsubdivider A, 10 packsubdivider B, 10 pack

1/4 [.1]1/4 [.1]1/2 [.2]1/2 [.2]3/4 [.3]1 [.5]1 [.5]

21/4 [57]21/4 [57]21/4 [57]51/4 [133]51/4 [133]13/4 [44]4 [102]

41/2 [114]41/2 [114]41/2 [114]41/2 [114]41/2 [114]41/4 [114]41/4 [114]

41/2 [114]91/4 [235]133/4 [349]41/2 [114]133/4 [349]2 [51]2 [51]


12.5

MA

TE

RIA

L HA

ND

LING


TOTES

T3ACET6BCET9CCET12DCETLIDCE

A ToteB ToteC ToteD ToteTote Lid

3 [2]4 [2]5 [2]6 [3]1 [1]

3 [76]6 [152]9 [229]12 [305]11/2 [37]

205/8 [524]205/8 [524]205/8 [524]205/8 [524]187/8 [478]

151/2 [394]151/2 [394]151/2 [394]151/2 [394]143/8 [364]


NOTES: • Tote Rails, Tote Bearers, Tote Holders and Mobile Tote Frames sold separately; see pages 12.6, 12.7 and 12.8.

TO ORDER SPECIFY:1) Product Number

DH

H

TLID

TOP

FRONT

T9C

DESCRIPTION • Totes provide storage and a means of transportation for materials in

workstations. • Totes hang from Tote Rails, mount beneath surfaces as drawers

using Tote Bearers or slide into Tote Holders and Mobile Tote Frames for use as drawers.

• Load capacity 50 lbs. when used with Tote Rails and 25 lbs. when used with Tote Bearers, Tote Holders and Mobile Tote Frames.

• Tote finish is Ice.

TOP FRONT

W W

Rev. 03.17.15

D

12.6

MA

TE

RIA

L H

AN

DLI

NG


TOTE RAILS & BEARERS

TR24TR30TR36TR48TR60TBDT

railrailrailrailrailtote bearer, pair

6 [3]8 [4]10 [4]12 [5]15 [7] 1 [.5]

43/4 [121]43/4 [121]43/4 [121]43/4 [121]43/4 [121] 3/4 [19]

24 [610]30 [762]36 [914]48 [1219]60 [1524] 1 [25]

11/4 [32]11/4 [32]11/4 [32]11/4 [32]11/4 [32] 141/4 [362]


DESCRIPTION Tote Rails• Tote Rails provide hanging support for Symbiote Totes and Co/Struc®

products.• Load capacity 200 lbs. evenly distributed.

Tote Bearers• Tote Beares are compatible with Symbiote Totes and Co/Struc

products.• Bearers include an integral stop to prevent Totes from extending out

of the track.• Sold as a pair. • Plastic finish is Dark Tone.

NOTES: • Symbiote Totes sold separately; see page 12.5.

• Tote Drawers are available. Contact Symbiote customer service for pricing and availability.

TO ORDER TOTE BEARER, SPECIFY:1) Product Number

D

H

W

TB

Front Side

TR(cat)

W

H

D

W D

H

FRONT FRONTSIDE SIDE

TO ORDER TOTE RAIL, SPECIFY:1) Product Number2) Finish Standard or Dissipative Standard Finishes: BK Black BT Black Texture* GL Grey Light Smooth GT Grey Light Texture* NW Neutral White ST Sand Texture* * Paint upcharge applies

TR

12.7

MA

TE

RIA

L HA

ND

LING


TO ORDER, SPECIFY:1) Product Number2) Finish Standard or Dissipative Standard Finishes: BK Black BT Black Texture* GL Grey Light Smooth GT Grey Light Texture* NW Neutral White ST Sand Texture*


3) Laminate Standard or Dissipative Standard Laminates: GL Grey Light GF Grey Fleck NW Neutral White WF White Fleck SA Sand SF Sand Fleck BK Black

NOTES: • Rail-mount Tote Holder requires two Tote Rails mounted vertically sold separately; see page 12.6.• Order Totes separately; see page 12.5.

Rev. 12.02.14

DESCRIPTION • Tote Holders provide storage for Symbiote Totes below a surface,

4-Legged Table or hanging on a Tote Rail.• Steel units include five slots in 3" intervals for Tote storage. The

rail-mount version also includes a 1" high standard laminate top with matching vinyl edge-band.

• Load capacity 125 lbs. total with a maximum capacity of 25 lbs. per Tote.

TOTE HOLDERS

STHS5STHR5STHF5

surface-mountrail-mount4-Legged Table mount

25 [11]38 [17]27 [12]

133/8 [340]143/8 [364]153/8 [390]

211/4 [541]211/2 [547]211/4 [541]

157/8 [403]163/4 [423]157/8 [403]


W

D

D

W

H

D

W

H

H

H

STHS5

STHS5

STHR5

FRONT SIDE

SIDE

SIDEFRONT

FRONT

STHF5

12.8

MA

TE

RIA

L H

AN

DLI

NG




3) Laminate Standard or Dissipative Standard Laminates: GL Grey Light GF Grey Fleck NW Neutral White WF White Fleck SA Sand SF Sand Fleck BK Black Dissipative Laminates: DG Dissipative Grey Light DNW Dissipative Neutral White DS Dissipative Sand DBK Dissipative Black

NOTES: • To order, specify paint finish first and laminate finish second, i.e. TF8CGLGF has Grey Light paint and Grey Fleck laminate. If either paint or laminate is dissipative, use the dissipative price.• Other dissipative laminates available upon request; consult factory for ordering information.• Customers are responsible for specifying ESD surface requirements; corporate ESD standards must be consulted prior to ordering.• Tote drawers are available. Contact Symbiote customer service for pricing and availability.

Rev. 03.03.10

DESCRIPTION • Tote Frames provide mobile storage for Symbiote Totes.• Steel units each include a 1" high standard or dissipative laminate

top with matching vinyl Edge-band, four 3" twin-wheel braking casters and Tote slots.

• Slots are at 3" intervals. Six-slot Tote Frames provide 18" of useable height while eight slot-frames provide 24", and twelve slot frames provide 36".

• Symbiote dissipative surfaces are manufactured with Nevamar® Static Dissipative Laminates (SDL). Nevamar SDL is manufactured to have a point to point and point to ground resistance of 1 x 106 to 1 x 109 ohms @ 10-60% relative humidity. Nevamar Static Dissipative Laminates conform to ESD Association Standard ESD-S4.1.

• Dissipative units each include a Laminate Grounding Terminal Kit and Ground Chain.

• Load capacity 250 lbs. per unit with a maximum capacity of 25 lbs. per individual Tote.

MOBILE TOTE FRAMES

Front Side

TF12 & TF6(cat)

TF12TF6

W

H

D

TF12CTF6C

Front Side

TF12 & TF6(cat)

TF12TF6

W

H

DW D

H

FRONT SIDE

TF6CTF8CTF12C

6-slot8-slot12-slot

36 [16]56 [25]77 [35]

231/2 [597]291/2 [749]411/2 [1054]

221/2 [527]221/2 [527]221/2 [527]

161/2 [419]161/2 [419]161/2 [419]


12.9

MA

TE

RIA

L HA

ND

LING


NOTES: • Components over 24" deep must not be mounted on Mobile Carts.• Components can only be mounted on the front side of Mobile Carts; plastic tubing inserted in the back side prevents mounting of components.• Optional Mobile Cart Handles and End Covers to finish exposed hardware can be ordered separately; see page 12.10.

W

Front

MCS(cat)

Side

D

H

DESCRIPTION • Mobile Carts function as single-sided mobile workstations, assembly

process carts or rack carts.• 2" steel frames provide structural support for and permit vertical

adjustment of components in 1" increments. 52" high carts provide 43" of useable hanger track while 66" high carts provide 57". Carts are equipped with connection points for end mounting of Flat Screen/Accessory Arms as well as attachment points for ESD grounding hardware.

• Assemblies each include 4" diameter polypropylene casters with totalock brakes (simultaneously locks the swivel and wheel).

• Dissipative carts each include a Ground Chain.• Load capacity 500 lbs. evenly distributed.



MCS5224MCS5230MCS6624MCS6630

60 [27]64 [29]67 [30]71 [32]

52 [1321]52 [1321]66 [1676]66 [1676]

24 [610]30 [762] 24 [610]30 [762]

291/2 [749]291/2 [749]291/2 [749]291/2 [749]


W

Front

MCS(cat)

Side

D

H

W

D

H

FRONT SIDE

MOBILE CARTS

Rev. 03.03.10

12.10

MA

TE

RIA

L H

AN

DLI

NG


NOTES: • To finish exposed hardware on the ends of Mobile Carts when handles are not used, Panel End Covers must be used. 52" high carts require two EC48 and 66" high carts require two EC62. Order separately; see page 2.12.

Rev. 03.03.10

MOBILE CART HANDLES & END COVERS



DESCRIPTION Mobile Cart Handles• Handles bolt to the ends of Mobile Carts and are composed of 1"

diameter steel tubing covered with black foam grip.• Handles mount in one vertical position only when used in

conjunction with Mobile Cart End Covers. Handles are adjustable in 6" increments when not used with other components.

• Sold in pairs.• Finish is Black Texture.

Mobile Cart End Covers• Metal covers finish exposed hardware on the ends of Mobile Carts

when Mobile Cart Handles are used.• Assemblies each include four metal covers to finish the exposed

hardware above and below the handles on each side of the cart, as well as attachment hardware.

• Finish must be specified.

W

Top

MCHS MFC

MCHS

MFC

Front Top Front

MCHS & MFC(cat)

DH

H

WD

WW

DDH

H

FRONT FRONTTOPTOP

MCHS MFC

W

Top

MCHS MFC

MCHS

MFC

Front Top Front

MCHS & MFC(cat)

DH

H

WD

MCHS

MFC

MCHSBTMFC52MFC66EC48EC62

handle, pairend cover, pair with handle cutoutsend cover, pair with handle cutoutsend coverend cover

6 [3]2 [1]3 [1]3 [1]4 [2]

7 [178]40 [1061]54 [1372]48 [1219]62 [1575]

21/2 [64]2 [51]2 [51] 2 [51]2 [51]

16 [406]1/2 [13]1/2 [13]1/2 [13]1/2 [13]

PRODUCT DIMENSIONS Product Height Width Depth WeightNumber Decription in. [mm] in. [mm] in. [mm] lb. [kg]

12.11

MA

TE

RIA

L HA

ND

LING


TO ORDER, SPECIFY:1) Product Number2) Laminate Standard or Dissipative Standard Laminates: GL Grey Light GF Grey Fleck NW Neutral White WF White Fleck SA Sand SF Sand Fleck BK Black Dissipative Laminates: DG Dissipative Grey Light DNW Dissipative Neutral White DS Dissipative Sand DBK Dissipative Black

NOTES: • Mobile Carts sold separately; see page 12.9.• Other dissipative laminates available upon request; consult factory for ordering information.• Customers are responsible for specifying ESD surface requirements; corporate ESD standards must be consulted prior to ordering.

Top

MFBDT & MFBLT(cat)

Side

W

D

H

DESCRIPTION • 11/4" high laminate bases attach to Mobile Cart feet with hook and

loop strips.• Bases have square corners with matching edge banding.• Symbiote dissipative surfaces are manufactured with Nevamar®

Static Dissipative Laminates (SDL). Nevamar SDL is manufactured to have a point to point and point to ground resistance of 1 x 106 to 1 x 109 ohms @10-60% relative humidity. Nevamar Static Dissipative Laminates conform to ESD Association Standard ESD-S4.1.

• Dissipative surfaces each include a Laminate Grounding Terminal Kit.

• Load capacity 200 lbs. evenly distributed.

Top

MFBDT & MFBLT(cat)

Side

W

D

H

W

DH

TOP SIDE

MFBLT24MFBLT30MFBDT24MFBDT30

standardstandarddissipativedissipative

20 [9]24 [11]20 [9]24 [11]

11/4 [32]11/4 [32]11/4 [32]11/4 [32]

24 [610]30 [762] 24 [610]30 [762]

24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]24 [610]


MOBILE CART BASES

Rev. 07.22.10

12.12

MA

TE

RIA

L H

AN

DLI

NG


SPOOL HOLDERS & SPINDLES

NOTES: • Additional spindles can be attached to a single Spool Holder. Order separately; see below.

DESCRIPTION • Spool Holders display spooled material such as labels, wires and

cables in workstations.• Assemblies each include one 5/8" diameter spindle and two

brackets. • Load capacity 100 lbs. evenly distributed.• Bracket finish is Black Texture.


SideFront

SPS3 SPS12

SPL

SPS, SPL & SPD(cat)

DW

H

W D

H

FRONT SIDE

SPS24BTSPS30BTSPS36BTSPS48BTSPL24BTSPL30BTSPL36BTSPL48BTSPD3SPD12SPD24SPD30SPD36SPD48

frame, shortframe, shortframe, shortframe, shortframe, longframe, longframe, longframe, longspindlespindlespindlespindlespindlespindle

3 [1]3 [1]4 [2]5 [2]4 [2]4 [2]5 [2]1/4 [.1]1/4 [.1]1/4 [.1]1/4 [.1]1/4 [.1]1/4 [.1]1/4 [.1]

41/2 [114]41/2 [114]41/2 [114]41/2 [114]51/2 [140]51/2 [140]51/2 [140]51/2 [140]5/8 [16]5/8 [16]5/8 [16]5/8 [16]5/8 [16]5/8 [16]

22 [559]28 [711]34 [864]46 [1168]22 [559]28 [711]34 [864]46 [1168]31/4 [83]10 [254]22 [559]28 [711]34 [864]46 [1168]

6 [152]6 [152]6 [152]6 [152]93/4 [248]93/4 [248]93/4 [248]93/4 [248]5/8 [16]5/8 [16]5/8 [16]5/8 [16]5/8 [16]5/8 [16]


SPS

SPL

SPD

Rev. 11.13.13

12.13

MA

TE

RIA

L HA

ND

LING


NOTES: • Bin Rails sold separately; see page 12.2.

DESCRIPTION • Holders provide storage for small parts, tools, solder and work aids

in workstations.• Holders hang from Bin Rails.• Tool Holders and Solder Holders hang from Bin Rails or from the

front of Holders.• Solder Holders each include a spindle.

SH5

SH5

TH10

H10

H10, TH10, SH5(cat)

H10TH10

Front Side

SideFront

SideFront

D

H

D

H

H

D

W

W

W

H10

SH5

TH10

SH5

SH5

TH10

H10

H10, TH10, SH5(cat)

H10TH10

Front Side

SideFront

SideFront

D

H

D

H

H

D

W

W

WW

W

W

D

D

D

H

H

H

FRONT

FRONT

FRONT

SIDE

H10

SH5

TH10

SIDE

SIDE



H10SH5TH10

holdersolder holdertool holder

1 [.5]1 [.5]1 [.5]

21/2 [64]2 [51]2 [51]

10 [254]4 [102]9 [229]

53/4 [146]31/2 [89]4 [102]


HOLDERS

Rev. 03.03.10

12.14

MA

TE

RIA

L H

AN

DLI

NG


OVERHEAD TOOL TRAVELERS

NOTES: • Cantilever Light Brackets sold separately; see page 8.8.• Additional Tool Traveler Cars sold separately; see below. Two cars maximum per rail.• Tool Traveler Cars with Air each include all parts needed to add the car to a Tool Traveler in the field. • Compressed Air Coil Tube Kits (CAC) to connect the air tool to the car sold separately; see page 8.23.Front Side

TTGA&TTG(cat)

W D

H

TTG

TTGA

Front Side

TTGA&TTG(cat)

W D

H

TTG

TTGA

DESCRIPTION • Tool Travelers suspend small hand tools above workstations

providing 8" of fore and aft adjustment.• Travelers attach to the top of Cantilever Light Brackets with or

without the use of Task Lights.• Units without air each include a rail, one car and two end supports.• Units with air each include a rail, one car with air adapter ending in

1/4" FPT, two end supports, a 3/8" push-in fitting for air feed of 1/2" OD tube and a 1/4" ID coiled poly tube.

• Load capacity 50 lbs.• Finish is Black Texture.


Front Side

TTGA&TTG(cat)

W D

H

TTG

TTGA

W D

H

FRONT SIDE

TTGA TTG

TTG48BTTTG60BTTTG72BTTTGA48BTTTGA60BTTTGA72BTTCGBTTCGABT

without airwithout airwithout airwith airwith airwith aircar without aircar with air

6 [3]7 [3]8 [4]8 [4]9 [4]10 [5]1 [.5]2 [1]

41/2 [108]41/2 [108]41/2 [108]41/2 [108]41/2 [108]41/2 [108]41/2 [108]41/2 [108]

48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]48 [1219]60 [1524]72 [1829]51/2 [140]51/2 [140]

121/2 [318]121/2 [318]121/2 [318]121/2 [318]121/2 [318]121/2 [318]1/4 [6]1/4 [6]


Documents

Symbiote Product Catalog